Avyakt murli for Saturday 31 January 1998

Warning : Sentence alignment between two languages is based on the number of characters. It is therefore not perfectly reliable.

You can correct the sentence alignment yourself on part or all of the murli.

Hindi Hinglish Analysis Word-by-word English

Mode

⁰

31-01-98 ओम शान्ति अव्यक्त बापदादामधुबन

31-01-98 ōm śhānti avyakt bāpadādāmadhuban

31-01-98 ōm śhānti avyakt[adj.] x

31-01-98 Om peace avyakt x

⁰> > 31-01-1998 Om Shanti Avyakt Bapdada Madhuban

पास विथ आनर बनने के लिए हर खज़ाने का एकाउण्ट चेक करके जमा करो

pass with honour bannē kē liē har|her khazānē kā account check karkē jamā karō

pass with honour[x] bannā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kē liē[x] harnā[root]|har|her khajānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] account check karnā[abs.] jamā karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]

pass with honours become[inf.m.pl.,o.] for (x[root]|x) treasure of account check do[abs.] accumulate

¹In order to pass with honour, check the account of all your treasures and accumulate them.

आज बापदादा हर एक छोटे-बड़े चारों ओर के देश-विदेश के बच्चों का भाग्य देख हर्षित हो रहे हैं .

āj bāpdādā har ēk chhōṭē-baṛē chārō̃ ōr kē|K dēśh-vidēśh kē|K bachchō̃ kā bhāgya dēkh harṣhit hō rahē haĩ .

āj bāpdādā har ēk[x] chhōṭē-baṛē[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] chārō̃ ōr[x] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K dēśh-vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēkhnā[root] harṣhit[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

today BapDada each one the young and the old everywhere (of|K) x (of|K) child of x see[root] cheerful be[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

²Today, BapDada is happy to see the fortune of all the young and old children of this land and abroad.

⁴

ऐसा भाग्य सारे कल्प में सिवाए ब्राह्मण आत्माओं के किसी का भी नहीं हो सकता .

aisā bhāgya sārē kalp mē̃ sivāē brāhmaṇ ātmāō̃ kē|K kisī kā bhī nahī̃ hō saktā .

aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] sārā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] sivāē brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] ātmā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K kōī[pn.sg.o.]|kuchh[pn.sg.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhī[p.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] saknā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] .

such x the whole cycle in except Brahmin soul (of|K) (some|anything) of too not (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) can[pres-part.m.sg.d.] .

³Throughout the entire kalpa, no one, apart from Brahmin souls, has this fortune throughout the entire kalpa.

⁵

देवतायें भी ब्राह्मण जीवन को श्रेष्ठ मानते हैं .

dēvtāyē̃ bhī brāhmaṇ jīvan kō śhrēṣhṭh māntē haĩ .

dēvtā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] bhī[p.] brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] śhrēṣhṭha[adj.] mānnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

deity too Brahmin life to elevated x[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁴Even the deities consider Brahmin life to be elevated.

⁶

हर एक अपने जीवन के आदि से देखो कि हमारा भाग्य जन्मते ही कितना श्रेष्ठ है .

har ēk apnē jīvan kē|K ādi sē dēkhō ki hamārā bhāgya janmatē hī kitnā śhrēṣhṭh hai .

har ēk[x] apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K ādi[adj.] sē[postp.] dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] ki[conj.] ham[pn.pl.kā] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] janmatē hī[x] kitnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] śhrēṣhṭha[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

each one one’s own life (of|K) etc. from see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] that we[.kā] x x so elevated be[pres.sg.23] .

⁵Each of you should examine your life from its beginning and see how elevated your future has been from the moment you took birth.

⁷

जीवन में जन्मते ही माँ बाप की पालना का भाग्य मिलता है .

jīvan mē̃ janmatē hī mā̃ bāp kī|key pālnā kā bhāgya miltā hai .

jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] janmatē hī[x] mā̃[n.f.;sg.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key pālnā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|pālnā[inf.m.sg.d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] milnā[pres.sg.m.23] .

life in x mother father (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) (x|sustenance[inf.m.sg.d.]) of x receive[pres.sg.m.23] .

⁸

उसके बाद पढ़ाई का भाग्य मिलता है .

uskē bād paṛhāī kā bhāgya miltā hai .

uskā[pn.sg.kē] bād paṛhāī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.]|paṛhānā[past-part.f.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] milnā[pres.sg.m.23] .

of that[.kē] after (study|teach[past-part.f.]) of x receive[pres.sg.m.23] .

⁶As soon as a child takes birth, it receives the fortune of being sustained by its mother and father.

⁹

उसके आगे गुरू द्वारा मत वा वरदान मिलता है .

uskē āgē gurū dvārā mat vā vardān miltā hai .

uskā[pn.sg.kē] āgē gurū[n.m.;sg.,d.] dvārā mat[n.m.;sg.,d.] vā vardān[n.m.;sg.,d.] milnā[pres.sg.m.23] .

of that[.kē] previously guru through directions or blessing receive[pres.sg.m.23] .

⁷Then it receives the fortune of education from a teacher.

¹⁰

आप बच्चों को पालना , पढ़ाई और श्रीमत , वरदान देने वाला कौन  ?

āp bachchō̃ kō pālnā , paṛhāī aur śhrīmat , vardān dēnē vālā kaun  ?

āp[pn.pl.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] pālnā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|pālnā[inf.m.sg.d.] , paṛhāī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.]|paṛhānā[past-part.f.] aur śhrīmat[n.m.;sg.,d.] , vardān[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] kaun[pn.;d.]  ?

you child to (x|sustenance[inf.m.sg.d.]) , (study|teach[past-part.f.]) and shrimat , blessing give[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who who  ?

⁸After that, it receives directions or blessings from a guru.

¹¹

परम आत्मा द्वारा यह तीनों ही प्राप्त हैं .

param ātmā dvārā yah tīnō̃ hī prāpt haĩ .

param[adj.] ātmā[n.f.;sg.] dvārā yah[pn.sg.d.] tīnō̃[adj.] hī[p.] prāpt[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

Supreme soul through this all three only reached be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

⁹Who gives you children sustenance, teachings, blessings and shrimat?

¹²

पालना देखो - परमात्म पालना कितने थोड़े कोटों में से कोई को मिलती है .

pālnā dēkhō - paramātma pālnā kitnē thōṛē kōṭō̃ mē̃ sē kōī kō miltī hai .

pālnā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|pālnā[inf.m.sg.d.] dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] - paramātmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] pālnā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|pālnā[inf.m.sg.d.] kitnā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] thōṛā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kōṭ[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] mē̃[postp.] sē[postp.] kōī[pn.;d.] kō[postp.] milnā[pres.sg.f.23] .

(x|sustenance[inf.m.sg.d.]) see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] - Supreme Soul (x|sustenance[inf.m.sg.d.]) so short x in from some to receive[pres.sg.f.23] .

¹⁰You receive all three from the Supreme Soul. ¹¹Look how only a handful out of many receive God’s sustenance!

¹³

परमात्म शिक्षक की पढ़ाई आपके सिवाए किसको भी नहीं मिलती है .

paramātma śhikṣhak kī|key paṛhāī āpkē sivāē kiskō bhī nahī̃ miltī hai .

paramātmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] śhikṣhak[x] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key paṛhāī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.]|paṛhānā[past-part.f.] āp[pn.pl.kē] sivāē kaun[pn.sg.kō] bhī[p.] nahī̃[neg] milnā[pres.sg.f.23] .

Supreme Soul teacher (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) (study|teach[past-part.f.]) you[.kē] except who[.kō] too not receive[pres.sg.f.23] .

¹²No one except you receives teachings from God, the Teacher.

¹⁴

सतगुरू द्वारा श्रीमत , वरदान आपको ही प्राप्त है .

satgurū dvārā śhrīmat , vardān āpkō hī prāpt hai .

satgurū[n.m.;sg.,d.] dvārā śhrīmat[n.m.;sg.,d.] , vardān[n.m.;sg.,d.] āp[pn.pl.kō] hī[p.] prāpt[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

Satguru through shrimat , blessing you[.kō] only reached be[pres.sg.23] .

¹³Only you receive shrimat and blessings from the Satguru.

¹⁵

तो अपने भाग्य को अच्छी तरह से जानते हो  ?

tō apnē bhāgya kō achchhī tarah sē jāntē hō  ?

tō apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] tarah[n.f.;sg.] sē[postp.] jānnā[pres.pl.m.2]  ?

then one’s own x to achcha x from know[pres.pl.m.2]  ?

¹⁴So, do you know your fortune very clearly?

¹⁶

भाग्य को स्मृति में रखते हुए झूलते रहते हो , गीत गाते रहते हो - वाह मेरा भाग्य  !

bhāgya kō smr̥iti mē̃ rakhtē huē jhūltē rahtē hō , gīt gātē rahtē hō - vāh mērā bhāgya  !

bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] smr̥iti[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] rakhnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] hōnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] jhūlnā[pres.pl.m.2.pres-part+rahnā] , gīt[n.m.;sg.,d.] gānā[pres.pl.m.2.pres-part+rahnā] - vāh maĩ[pn.sg.kā] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.]  !

x to awareness in keep[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] be[past-part.m.pl.,o.] swing[pres.pl.m.2.pres-part+rahnā] , x sing[pres.pl.m.2.pres-part+rahnā] - wah! I[.kā] x  !

¹⁵Do you continually swing whilst keeping your fortune in your awareness? ¹⁶Do you sing the song, “How wonderful is my fortune!”?

¹⁷

अमृतवेले से लेकर जब उठते हो तो परमात्म प्यार में लवलीन होके उठते हो .

amr̥itvēlē sē lēkar jab uṭhtē hō tō paramātma pyār mē̃ lavlīn hōkē uṭhtē hō .

amr̥itvēlā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] sē[postp.] lēnā[abs.] jab uṭhnā[pres.pl.m.2] tō paramātmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] lavlīn[adj.] hōnā[abs.] uṭhnā[pres.pl.m.2] .

amrit vela from take[abs.] when wake up[pres.pl.m.2] then Supreme Soul love in x be[abs.] wake up[pres.pl.m.2] .

¹⁷At the time of amrit vela, when you wake up, you awaken whilst absorbed in God’s love. ¹⁸God’s love awakens you.

¹⁸

परमात्म प्यार उठाता है .

paramātma pyār uṭhātā hai .

paramātmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] uṭhānā[pres.sg.m.23] .

Supreme Soul love uplift[pres.sg.m.23] .

¹⁹The day starts in God’s love.

¹⁹

दिनचर्या की आदि परमात्म प्यार होता है .

dincharyā kī|key ādi paramātma pyār hōtā hai .

dincharyā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key ādi[adj.] paramātmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23] .

timetable (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) etc. Supreme Soul love be[pres.sg.m.23] .

²⁰If you didn’t have this love, you wouldn't be able to wake up.

²⁰

प्यार नहीं होता तो उठ नहीं सकते .

pyār nahī̃ hōtā tō uṭh nahī̃ saktē .

pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] tō uṭhnā[root] nahī̃[neg] saknā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] .

love not be[pres-part.m.sg.d.] then wake up[root] not can[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] .

²¹Love rings the bell of your clock.

²¹

प्यार ही आपके समय की घण्टी है .

pyār hī āpkē samay kī|key ghaṇṭī hai .

pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] hī[p.] āp[pn.pl.kē] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key ghaṇṭī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

love only you[.kē] time (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) ringing of the bell be[pres.sg.23] .

²²The bell of love awakens you.

²²

प्यार की घण्टी आपको उठाती है .

pyār kī|key ghaṇṭī āpkō uṭhātī hai .

pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key ghaṇṭī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] āp[pn.pl.kō] uṭhānā[pres.sg.f.23] .

love (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) ringing of the bell you[.kō] uplift[pres.sg.f.23] .

²³

सारे दिन में परमात्म साथ हर कार्य कराता है .

sārē din mē̃ paramātma sāth har|her kārya karātā hai .

sārā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] din[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] paramātmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] harnā[root]|har|her kārya[n.m.;sg.,d.] karānā[pres.sg.m.23] .

the whole day in Supreme Soul with (x[root]|x) task make commit[pres.sg.m.23] .

²³Throughout the entire day, God’s company enables you to carry out every task.

²⁴

कितना बड़ा भाग्य है जो स्वयं बाप अपना परमधाम छोड़कर आपको शिक्षा देने के लिए आते हैं .

kitnā baṛā bhāgya hai jō svayã bāp apnā paramdhām chhōṛkar āpkō śhikṣhā dēnē kē liē ātē haĩ .

kitnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] baṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] jō[pn.;d.] svayã bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] apnā[pn.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.]|apnānā[root] paramdhām[n.m.;sg.,d.] chhōṛnā[abs.] āp[pn.pl.kō] śhikṣhā[n.f.;sg.] dēnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kē liē[x] ānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

so very x be[pres.sg.23] that x father (one’s own|adopt[root]) x renounce[abs.] you[.kō] teachings give[inf.m.pl.,o.] for come[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

²⁴You fortune is so great that Baba Himself leaves His supreme land in order to come here and give you teachings.

²⁵

ऐसे कभी सुना कि भगवान रोज़ अपने धाम को छोड़ पढ़ाने के लिए आते हैं  !

aisē kabhī sunā ki bhagvān rōz apnē dhām kō chhōṛ paṛhānē kē liē ātē haĩ  !

aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kabhī[adv.] sunnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]|sunānā[root] ki[conj.] bhagvān[n.m.;sg.,d.] rōz apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] dhām[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] chhōṛnā[root] paṛhānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kē liē[x] ānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3]  !

such ever (listen[past-part.m.sg.d.]|speak[root]) that God day one’s own land to renounce[root] teach[inf.m.pl.,o.] for come[pres.pl.m.12hon3]  !

²⁵Did you ever hear before that God leaves His home every day in order to teach you?

²⁶

आत्मायें चाहे कितना भी दूर-दूर से आयें , परमधाम से दूर और कोई देश नहीं है .

ātmāyē̃ chāhē kitnā bhī dūr-dūr sē āyē̃ , paramdhām sē dūr aur kōī dēśh nahī̃ hai .

ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] kitnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhī[p.] dūr[adj.] sē[postp.] ānā[opt.pl.12hon3] , paramdhām[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē dūr[x] aur kōī[x] dēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

soul (x[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|whether|x[opt.sg.23]) so too distant from come[opt.pl.12hon3] , x distant from someone else land not be[pres.sg.23] .

²⁶No matter how far away souls come from, there is no place further away than Paramdham.

²⁷

है कोई देश  ?

hai kōī dēśh  ?

hōnā[pres.sg.23] kōī[pn.;d.] dēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.]  ?

be[pres.sg.23] some land  ?

²⁷Is there any land further away?

²⁸

अमेरिका , अफ्रीका दूर है  ?

America , aphrīkā dūr hai  ?

America , aphrīkā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] dūr[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ?

America , Africa distant be[pres.sg.23]  ?

²⁸Is America or Africa as far away?

²⁹

परमधाम ऊंचे ते ऊंचा धाम है .

paramdhām ūñchē tē ūñchā dhām hai .

paramdhām[n.m.;sg.,d.] ūñch[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sē ūñch[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] dhām[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

x elevated from elevated land be[pres.sg.23] .

²⁹Paramdham is the highest land.

³⁰

ऊंचे ते ऊंचे धाम से ऊंचे ते ऊंचे भगवन , ऊंचे ते ऊंचे बच्चों को पढ़ाने आते हैं .

ūñchē tē ūñchē dhām sē ūñchē tē ūñchē bhagvan , ūñchē tē ūñchē bachchō̃ kō paṛhānē ātē haĩ .

ūñch[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sē ūñch[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] dhām[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] ūñch[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sē ūñch[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhagvān[n.m.;sg.,d.] , ūñch[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sē ūñch[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] paṛhānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] ānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

elevated from elevated land from elevated from elevated God , elevated from elevated child to teach[inf.m.pl.,o.] come[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

³⁰God, the Higheston High, comes from the highestonhigh land to teach the highestonhigh children.

³¹

ऐसा भाग्य अपना अनुभव करते हो  ?

aisā bhāgya apnā anubhav kartē hō  ?

aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] apnā[pn.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.]|apnānā[root] anubhav[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[pres.pl.m.2]  ?

such x (one’s own|adopt[root]) experience do[pres.pl.m.2]  ?

³¹Do you experience your fortune to be like this?

³²

सतगुरू के रूप में हर कार्य के लिए श्रीमत भी देते और साथ भी देते हैं .

satgurū kē|K rūp mē̃ har|her kārya kē liē śhrīmat bhī dētē aur sāth bhī dētē haĩ .

satgurū[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K rūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] harnā[root]|har|her kārya[n.m.;sg.,d.] kē liē[x] śhrīmat[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] dēnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] aur sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

Satguru (of|K) Rup in (x[root]|x) task for shrimat too give[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] and with too give[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

³²In the form of the Satguru, He gives you shrimat and also His company in every task.

³³

सिर्फ मत नहीं देते हैं , साथ भी देते हैं .

sirph mat nahī̃ dētē haĩ , sāth bhī dētē haĩ .

sirph[adj.] mat[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

only directions not give[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , with too give[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

³³He doesn’t just give His directions, He also gives you His companionship.

³⁴

आप क्या गीत गाते हो  ?

āp kyā gīt gātē hō  ?

āp[pn.pl.] kyā gīt[n.m.;sg.,d.] gānā[pres.pl.m.2]  ?

you what x sing[pres.pl.m.2]  ?

³⁴What song do you children sing?

³⁵

मेरे साथ-साथ हो कि दूर हो  ?

mērē sāth-sāth hō ki dūr hō  ?

maĩ[pn.sg.kē] sāth-sāth hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] ki[conj.] dūr[adj.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2]  ?

I[.kē] x (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) that distant (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2])  ?

³⁵Are you with Me or far away from Me?

³⁶

साथ है ना  ?

sāth hai nā  ?

sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā  ?

with be[pres.sg.23] ∅  ?

³⁶You are with Me, are you not?

³⁷

अगर स्नते हो तो परमात्म टीचर से , अगर खाते भी हो तो बापदादा के साथ खाते हो .

agar snatē hō tō paramātma teacher sē , agar khātē bhī hō tō bāpdādā kē sāth khātē hō .

agar x hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] tō paramātmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] teacher sē[postp.] , agar khātā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.]|khānā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] bhī[p.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] tō bāpdādā kē sāth[x] khānā[pres.pl.m.2] .

if x (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) then Supreme Soul teacher from , if (account|eat[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]) too (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) then BapDada with eat[pres.pl.m.2] .

³⁷If you listen to anyone, it is the Supreme Teacher. ³⁸When you eat, you eat with BapDada.

³⁸

अकेले खाते हो तो आपकी गलती है .

akēlē khātē hō tō āpkī galtī hai .

akēlā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] khānā[pres.pl.m.2] tō āp[pn.pl.kī] galnā[pres.sg.f.23] .

alone eat[pres.pl.m.2] then you[.kī] x[pres.sg.f.23] .

³⁹When you eat on your own, that is your mistake.

³⁹

बाप तो कहते हैं मेरे साथ खाओ .

bāp tō kahtē haĩ mērē sāth khāō .

bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] tō kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] maĩ[pn.sg.kē] sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] khānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

father then say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] I[.kē] with eat[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴⁰Baba says: Eat with Me!

⁴⁰

आप बच्चों का भी वायदा है - साथ रहेंगे , साथ खायेंगे , साथ पियेंगे , साथ सोयेंगे और साथ चलेंगे … सोना भी अकेले नहीं है .

āp bachchō̃ kā bhī vāydā hai - sāth rahē̃gē , sāth khāyēṅgē , sāth piyē̃gē , sāth sōyēṅgē aur sāth chalē̃gē … sōnā bhī akēlē nahī̃ hai .

āp[pn.pl.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhī[p.] vāydā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] - sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] rahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] khānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] pīnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] sōnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] aur sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] chalnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] … sōnā[inf.m.sg.d.]|sōnā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] bhī[p.] akēlā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

you child of too promise be[pres.sg.23] - with remain[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , with eat[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , with drink[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , with sleep[fut.m.pl.12hon3] and with continue[fut.m.pl.12hon3] … (sleep[inf.m.sg.d.]|gold) too alone not be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴¹You children have also promised: I will live with You, I will eat and drink with You, I will sleep with You and I will return home with You. ⁴²You mustn’t go to sleep on your own.

⁴¹

अकेले सोते हैं तो बुरे स्वप्न वा बुरे ख्यालात स्वप्न में भी आते हैं .

akēlē sōtē haĩ tō burē svapn vā burē khyālāt svapn mē̃ bhī ātē haĩ .

akēlā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] tō burā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] svapn[n.m.;sg.,d.] vā burā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] khyālāt svapn[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] ānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

alone sleep[pres.pl.m.12hon3] then bad dream or bad thought dream in too come[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁴³When you sleep on your own, the dreams you have are bad or have bad thoughts in them.

⁴²

लेकिन बाप का इतना प्यार है जो सदा कहते हैं मेरे साथ सोओ , अकेले नहीं सोओ .

lēkin bāp kā itnā pyār hai jō sadā kahtē haĩ mērē sāth sōō , akēlē nahī̃ sōō .

lēkin bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] itnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] jō[pn.;d.] sadā kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] maĩ[pn.sg.kē] sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] sōnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , akēlā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] nahī̃[neg] sōnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

but father of such love be[pres.sg.23] that constantly say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] I[.kē] with sleep[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , alone not sleep[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴⁴However, it is because Baba has so much love for you that He always tells you to sleep with Him.

⁴³

तो उठते हो तो भी साथ , सोते हो तो भी साथ , खाते हो तो भी साथ , चलते हो तो भी साथ .

tō uṭhtē hō tō bhī sāth , sōtē hō tō bhī sāth , khātē hō tō bhī sāth , chaltē hō tō bhī sāth .

tō uṭhnā[pres.pl.m.2] tō bhī[x] sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] , sōnā[pres.pl.m.2] tō bhī[x] sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] , khānā[pres.pl.m.2] tō bhī[x] sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] , chalnā[pres.pl.m.2] tō bhī[x] sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] .

then wake up[pres.pl.m.2] ∅ with , sleep[pres.pl.m.2] ∅ with , eat[pres.pl.m.2] ∅ with , continue[pres.pl.m.2] ∅ with .

⁴⁴

अगर दफ्तर में जाते हो , बिजनेस करते हो तो भी बिजनेस के आप ट्रस्टी हो लेकिन मालिक बाप है .

agar daphtar mē̃ jātē hō , business kartē hō tō bhī business kē|K āp trustee hō lēkin mālik bāp hai .

agar daphtar[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] jānā[pres.pl.m.2] , business karnā[pres.pl.m.2] tō bhī[x] business kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K āp[pn.pl.] trustee hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] lēkin mālik[n.m.;sg.,d.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

if x in go[pres.pl.m.2] , business do[pres.pl.m.2] ∅ business (of|K) you trustee (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) but master father be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴⁵When you awaken, you awaken with the Father, when you go to sleep, you go to sleep with Him; when you eat, you eat with Him and when you go for a walk you also walk with Him. ⁴⁶When you go to your office or business, you are just a trustee of that business, and Baba is the Master.

⁴⁵

दफ्तर में जाते हो तो आप जानते हो कि हमारा डायरेक्टर , बॉस बापदादा है , यह निमित्त मात्र है , उनके डायरेक्शन से काम करते हैं .

daphtar mē̃ jātē hō tō āp jāntē hō ki hamārā director , boss bāpdādā hai , yah nimitt mātra hai , unkē direction sē kām kartē haĩ .

daphtar[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] jānā[pres.pl.m.2] tō āp[pn.pl.] jānnā[pres.pl.m.2] ki[conj.] ham[pn.pl.kā] director , boss bāpdādā hōnā[pres.sg.23] , yah[pn.sg.d.] nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] mātra hōnā[pres.sg.23] , vah[pn.pl.kē] direction sē[postp.] kām[n.m.;sg.,d.]|kām[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

x in go[pres.pl.m.2] then you know[pres.pl.m.2] that we[.kā] Director , boss BapDada be[pres.sg.23] , this instrument just be[pres.sg.23] , that[.kē] direction from (lust|task) do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁴⁷When you go to work, you know that your Director, your Boss, is BapDada. ⁴⁸You are just an instrument, and doing everything under His directions.

⁴⁶

कभी उदास हो जाते हो तो बाप फ्रेंड बनकर बहलाते हैं .

kabhī udās hō jātē hō tō bāp phrēṇḍ bankar bahlātē haĩ .

kabhī[adv.] udās[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.m.2.root+jānā] tō bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] x bannā[abs.] bahlānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

ever unhappy be[pres.pl.m.2.root+jānā] then father x become[abs.] entertain[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁴⁹When you become sad sometimes, Baba becomes your Friend and tries to cheer you up.

⁴⁷

फ्रेंड भी बन जाता है .

phrēṇḍ bhī ban jātā hai .

x bhī[p.] bannā[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

x too become[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

⁵⁰Baba also becomes your Friend.

⁴⁸

कभी प्रेम में रोते हो , आंसू आते हैं तो बाप पोछने के लिए भी आते हैं और आपके आंसू दिल के डिब्बी में मोती समान समा देते हैं .

kabhī prēm mē̃ rōtē hō , āṅsū ātē haĩ tō bāp pōchhnē kē liē bhī ātē haĩ aur āpkē āṅsū dil kē|K ḍibbī mē̃ mōtī samān samā dētē haĩ .

kabhī[adv.] prēm[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] rōnā[pres.pl.m.2] , āṅsū[n.m.;sg.,d.] ānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] tō bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] pōchhnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kē liē[x] bhī[p.] ānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] aur āp[pn.pl.kē] āṅsū[n.m.;sg.,d.] dil[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K ḍibbī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] mē̃[postp.] mōtī[n.m.;sg.,d.] samān[adj.] samānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+dēnā] .

ever love in cry[pres.pl.m.2] , tear come[pres.pl.m.12hon3] then father wipe away[inf.m.pl.,o.] for too come[pres.pl.m.12hon3] and you[.kē] tear heart (of|K) small box in pearl equal merge[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+dēnā] .

⁵¹When you shed tears of love, Baba comes to wipe away your tears; He places your tears in His jewelcase of His heart like pearls.

⁴⁹

अगर कभी-कभी नटखट होके रूठ भी जाते हो , रूसते भी हो बहुत मीठा-मीठा .

agar kabhī-kabhī naṭkhaṭ hōkē rūṭh bhī jātē hō , rūstē bhī hō bahut mīṭhā-mīṭhā .

agar kabhī[adv.] naṭkhaṭ[adj.] hōnā[abs.] rūṭhnā[root] bhī[p.] jānā[pres.pl.m.2] , rūsnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] bhī[p.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] bahut mīṭhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] .

if ever mischievous be[abs.] sulk[root] too go[pres.pl.m.2] , sulk[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] too (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) very sweet .

⁵²When you become mischievous sometimes and sulk, and you do sulk in a sweet way, Baba comes to make it up with you.

⁵⁰

लेकिन बाप रूठे हुए को भी मनाने आते हैं .

lēkin bāp rūṭhē huē kō bhī manānē ātē haĩ .

lēkin bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] rūṭhnā[opt.sg.23]|rūṭhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] hōnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] kō[postp.] bhī[p.] manānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] ānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

but father (sulk[opt.sg.23]|sulk[past-part.m.pl.,o.]) be[past-part.m.pl.,o.] to too celebrate[inf.m.pl.,o.] come[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁵³He says, “It doesn’t matter, child. ⁵⁴Now, move forward.

⁵¹

बच्चे कोई बात नहीं , आगे बढ़ो .

bachchē kōī bāt nahī̃ , āgē baṛhō .

bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] kōī[pn.;d.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] nahī̃[neg] , āgē baṛhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

child some matter not , previously grow[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁵⁵Whatever happened has now become the past.

⁵²

जो कुछ हुआ बीत गया , भूल जाओ , बीती सो बीती करो , ऐसे मनाते भी हैं .

jō kuchh huā bīt gayā , bhūl jāō , bītī sō bītī karō , aisē manātē bhī haĩ .

jō kuchh[x] hōnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] bītnā[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā] , bhūl jānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , bītnā[past-part.f.]|bītī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] sō|sōnā[root] bītnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.past-part+karnā] , aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] manānā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

whatever be[past-part.m.sg.d.] pass[past-part.m.sg.d..root+jānā] , x[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , (pass[past-part.f.]|past) (x|sleep[root]) pass[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.past-part+karnā] , such celebrate[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] too be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

⁵⁶Forget it! ⁵⁷Let the past be the past!”. ⁵⁸He tries to make it up with you in this way.

⁵³

तो हर दिनचर्या किसके साथ है  ?

tō har|her dincharyā kiskē sāth hai  ?

tō harnā[root]|har|her dincharyā[n.f.;sg.] kaun[pn.sg.kē] sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ?

then (x[root]|x) timetable who[.kē] with be[pres.sg.23]  ?

⁵⁹So, with whom do you spend your whole day?

⁵⁴

बापदादा के साथ .

bāpdādā kē sāth .

bāpdādā kē sāth[x] .

BapDada with .

⁶⁰With BapDada.

⁵⁵

बापदादा को कभी-कभी बच्चों की बातों पर हंसी भी आती है .

bāpdādā kō kabhī-kabhī bachchō̃ kī|key bātō̃ par hansī bhī ātī hai .

bāpdādā kō[postp.] kabhī[adv.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key bāt[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] hãsnā[past-part.f.] bhī[p.] ānā[pres.sg.f.23] .

BapDada to ever child (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) matter (at|other) laugh out[past-part.f.] too come[pres.sg.f.23] .

⁶¹Sometimes, BapDada is amused by the children when they say, “Baba, I forget You.”

⁵⁶

जब कहते हैं बाबा आप भूल जाते हो , एक तरफ तो कहते हैं कम्बाइन्ड है , कम्बाइन्ड कभी भूलता है क्या  ?

jab kahtē haĩ bābā āp bhūl jātē hō , ēk taraph tō kahtē haĩ combined hai , combined kabhī bhūltā hai kyā  ?

jab kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] bābā āp[pn.pl.] bhūl jānā[pres.pl.m.2] , ēk taraph[x] tō kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] combined hōnā[pres.sg.23] , combined kabhī[adv.] bhūlnā[pres.sg.m.23] kyā  ?

when say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] Baba you x[pres.pl.m.2] , x then say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] combined be[pres.sg.23] , combined ever forget[pres.sg.m.23] what  ?

⁶²On your side, you say that you are combined. ⁶³So, can you forget the One with whom you are combined? ⁶⁴When you are together with someone, how can you forget the one who is with you?

⁵⁷

जब साथ-साथ है तो साथ वाला भूल सकता है क्या  ?

jab sāth-sāth hai tō sāth vālā bhūl saktā hai kyā  ?

jab sāth-sāth hōnā[pres.sg.23] tō sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhūlnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+saknā] kyā  ?

when x be[pres.sg.23] then with those who forget[pres.sg.m.23.root+saknā] what  ?

⁶⁵Therefore, can you forget Him? ⁶⁶So, Baba says: “Well done" children!

⁵⁸

तो बाबा कहते हैं शाबास - बच्चों में इतनी ताकत है जो कम्बाइन्ड को भी अलग कर देते हैं  !

tō bābā kahtē haĩ śhābās - bachchō̃ mē̃ itnī tākat hai jō combined kō bhī alag kar dētē haĩ  !

tō bābā kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] śhābās - bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] mē̃[postp.] itnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] tākat[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] jō[pn.;d.] combined kō[postp.] bhī[p.] alag[adj.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+dēnā]  !

then Baba say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] well done! - child in such power be[pres.sg.23] that combined to too separate do[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+dēnā]  !

⁶⁷You have so much strength that you are able to separate yourself from the One combined with you.

⁵⁹

है कम्बाइन्ड और थोड़ा सा माया कम्बाइन्ड को भी अलग कर देती है .

hai combined aur thōṛā sā māyā combined kō bhī alag kar dētī hai .

hōnā[pres.sg.23] combined aur thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] sā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] māyā[n.f.;sg.] combined kō[postp.] bhī[p.] alag[adj.] karnā[pres.sg.f.23.root+dēnā] .

be[pres.sg.23] combined and short x Maya combined to too separate do[pres.sg.f.23.root+dēnā] .

⁶⁸You are combined, and yet even a little bit of Maya separates those who are combined!

⁶⁰

बापदादा बच्चों का खेल देखते यही कहते हैं बच्चे , अपने भाग्य को सदा स्मृति में रखो .

bāpdādā bachchō̃ kā khēl dēkhtē yahī kahtē haĩ bachchē , apnē bhāgya kō sadā smr̥iti mē̃ rakhō .

bāpdādā bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] khēl[n.m.;sg.,d.]|khēlnā[root] dēkhnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] yahī[pn.;d.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] , apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] sadā smr̥iti[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] rakhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

BapDada child of (play|play[root]) see[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] this say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] child , one’s own x to constantly awareness in keep[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁶⁹When BapDada sees the games the children play what does He say? ⁷⁰Constantly remain conscious of your fortune.

⁶¹

होता क्या है  ?

hōtā kyā hai  ?

hōnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] kyā hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ?

be[pres-part.m.sg.d.] what be[pres.sg.23]  ?

⁶²

सोचते हो हाँ मेरा भाग्य बहुत ऊंचा है लेकिन सोचना-स्वरूप बनते हो , स्मृति-स्वरूप नहीं बनते हो .

sōchtē hō hā̃ mērā bhāgya bahut ūñchā hai lēkin sōchnā-svarūp bantē hō , smr̥iti-svarūp nahī̃ bantē hō .

sōchnā[pres.pl.m.2] hā̃ maĩ[pn.sg.kā] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] bahut ūñch[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin sōchnā svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[pres.pl.m.2] , smr̥iti svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] bannā[pres.pl.m.2] .

think[pres.pl.m.2] yes I[.kā] x very elevated be[pres.sg.23] but embodiment of thoughts become[pres.pl.m.2] , x not become[pres.pl.m.2] .

⁷¹What happens is that you think, “Yes, my fortune is very elevated’, but you just become the embodiment of these thoughts, you do not become the embodiment of this consciousness.

⁶³

सोचते बहुत अच्छा हो मैं तो यह हूँ , मैं तो यह हूँ , मैं तो यह हूँ … सुनाते भी बहुत अच्छा हो .

sōchtē bahut achchhā hō maĩ tō yah hū̃ , maĩ tō yah hū̃ , maĩ tō yah hū̃ … sunātē bhī bahut achchhā hō .

sōchnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] maĩ[pn.sg.d.] tō yah[pn.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.1] , maĩ[pn.sg.d.] tō yah[pn.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.1] , maĩ[pn.sg.d.] tō yah[pn.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.1] … sunānā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] bhī[p.] bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] .

think[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] very achcha (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) I then this be[pres.sg.1] , I then this be[pres.sg.1] , I then this be[pres.sg.1] … speak[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] too very achcha (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

⁷²You think very well, “I am this, I am this, I am this”. ⁷³You also relate it all to others very well.

⁶⁴

लेकिन जो सोचते हो , जो कहते हो उसका स्वरूप बन जाओ .

lēkin jō sōchtē hō , jō kahtē hō uskā svarūp ban jāō .

lēkin jō[pn.;d.] sōchnā[pres.pl.m.2] , jō[pn.;d.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.2] vah[pn.sg.kā] svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+jānā] .

but that think[pres.pl.m.2] , that say[pres.pl.m.2] that[.kā] form become[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+jānā] .

⁷⁴However, now you have to become an embodiment of what you think and what you say.

⁶⁵

स्वरूप बनने में कमी पड़ जाती है .

svarūp bannē mē̃ kamī paṛ jātī hai .

svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[inf.m.pl.,o.] mē̃[postp.] kamī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] paṛnā[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] .

form become[inf.m.pl.,o.] in x fall[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] .

⁷⁵You lack becoming the embodiment of that.

⁶⁶

हर बात का स्वरूप बन जाओ .

har|her bāt kā svarūp ban jāō .

harnā[root]|har|her bāt[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+jānā] .

(x[root]|x) matter of form become[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+jānā] .

⁷⁶Become an embodiment in every aspect!

⁶⁷

जो सोचो वह स्वरूप भी अनुभव करो .

jō sōchō vah svarūp bhī anubhav karō .

jō[pn.;d.] sōchnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] vah[pn.sg.d.] svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] anubhav[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

that think[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] that form too experience do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁷⁷Experience the form of whatever you think!

⁶⁸

सबसे बड़े ते बड़ा है अनुभवी मूर्त बनना .

sabsē baṛē tē baṛā hai anubhavī mūrt bannā .

sabsē baṛā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sē baṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] anubhavī[adj.] mūrti, mūrt[n.f.;sg.] bannā[inf.m.sg.d.] .

the most very from very be[pres.sg.23] experienced image become[inf.m.sg.d.] .

⁷⁸The greatest form is to become the embodiment of your experience.

⁶⁹

अनादि काल में जब परमधाम में हैं तो सोचना स्वरूप नहीं हैं , स्मृति स्वरूप हैं .

anādi kāl mē̃ jab paramdhām mē̃ haĩ tō sōchnā svarūp nahī̃ haĩ , smr̥iti svarūp haĩ .

anādi kāl[x] mē̃[postp.] jab paramdhām[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] tō sōchnā svarūp[x] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , smr̥iti svarūp[x] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

eternally in when x in be[pres.pl.12hon3] then embodiment of thoughts not be[pres.pl.12hon3] , x be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

⁷⁹When you are in Paramdham in your eternal form, you are not an embodiment of thoughts, but an embodiment of consciousness.

⁷⁰

मैं आत्मा हूँ , मैं आत्मा हूँ - यह भी सोचने का नहीं है , स्वरूप ही है .

maĩ ātmā hū̃ , maĩ ātmā hū̃ - yah bhī sōchnē kā nahī̃ hai , svarūp hī hai .

maĩ ātmā hū̃[x] , maĩ ātmā hū̃[x] - yah[pn.sg.d.] bhī[p.] sōchnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

I am a soul , I am a soul - this too think[inf.m.pl.,o.] of not be[pres.sg.23] , form only be[pres.sg.23] .

⁸⁰You don’t even have to think, “I am a soul, I am a soul”. ⁸¹You are that form.

⁷¹

आदिकाल में भी इस समय के पुरूषार्थ का प्रालब्ध स्वरूप है .

ādikāl mē̃ bhī is samay kē|K purūṣhārth kā prālabdh svarūp hai .

ādi kāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] is samay[x] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K puruṣhārth kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] prālabdh[n.f.;sg.] svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

beginning in too at this time (of|K) effort of reward form be[pres.sg.23] .

⁸²In your original form, you become the embodiment of the effort you make at this time.

⁷²

सोचना नहीं पड़ता - मैं देवता हूँ , मैं देवता हूँ … स्वरूप है .

sōchnā nahī̃ paṛtā - maĩ dēvtā hū̃ , maĩ dēvtā hū̃ … svarūp hai .

sōchnā[inf.m.sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] paṛnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] - maĩ[pn.sg.d.] dēvtā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.1] , maĩ[pn.sg.d.] dēvtā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.1] … svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

think[inf.m.sg.d.] not fall[pres-part.m.sg.d.] - I deity be[pres.sg.1] , I deity be[pres.sg.1] … form be[pres.sg.23] .

⁸³You don’t have to think, “I am a deity, I am a deity”. ⁸⁴You are that form.

⁷³

तो जब अनादिकाल , आदिकाल में स्वरूप है तो अब भी अन्त में स्वरूप बनो .

tō jab anādikāl , ādikāl mē̃ svarūp hai tō ab bhī ant mē̃ svarūp banō .

tō jab anādi kāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] , ādi kāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] tō ab[adv.] bhī[p.] ant[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

then when eternally , beginning in form be[pres.sg.23] then now too end in form become[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁸⁵Therefore, since you are the embodiment in your eternal form and your original form, now become an embodiment of this time also.

⁷⁴

स्वरूप बनने से अपने गुण , शक्तियां स्वतः ही इमर्ज होते हैं .

svarūp bannē sē apnē guṇ , śhaktiyā̃ svataḥ hī emerge hōtē haĩ .

svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[inf.m.pl.,o.] sē[postp.] apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] guṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] , śhakti[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] svataḥ hī[p.] emerge hōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

form become[inf.m.pl.,o.] from one’s own virtue , Shakti automatically only emerge be[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁸⁶By becoming this embodiment, your virtues and powers automatically emerge.

⁷⁵

जैसे कोई भी आक्यूपेशन वाले जब अपने सीट पर सेट होते हैं तो वह आक्यूपेशन के गुण , कर्तव्य ऑटोमेटिक इमर्ज होते हैं .

jaisē kōī bhī occupation vālē jab apnē seat par set hōtē haĩ tō vah occupation kē|K guṇ , kartavya automatic emerge hōtē haĩ .

jaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kōī bhī[x] occupation vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] jab apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] seat par[postp.]|par[adj.] set hōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] tō vah[pn.sg.d.] occupation kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K guṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] , kartavya[n.m.;sg.,d.] automatic emerge hōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

like anyone occupation those who when one’s own seat (at|other) set be[pres.pl.m.12hon3] then that occupation (of|K) virtue , activity x emerge be[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁸⁷When someone of any occupation is seated on his seat, then the abilities and duties of that occupation automatically emerge.

⁷⁶

ऐसे आप सदा स्वरूप के सीट पर सेट रहो तो हर गुण , हर शक्ति , हर प्रकार का नशा स्वतः ही इमर्ज होगा .

aisē āp sadā svarūp kē|K seat par set rahō tō har|her guṇ , har|her śhakti , har|her prakār kā naśhā svataḥ hī emerge hōgā .

⁷⁷

मेहनत नहीं करनी पड़ेगी .

mēhnat nahī̃ karnī paṛēgī .

mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] nahī̃[neg] karnā[fut.f.sg.23.oblig2] .

effort not do[fut.f.sg.23.oblig2] .

⁸⁸So if you too constantly remain seated on the seat of your form, then every virtue, power and type of intoxication will automatically emerge.

⁷⁸

इसको कहा जाता है ब्राह्मणपन की नेचुरल नेचर , जिसमें और सब अनेक जन्मों की नेचर्स समाप्त हो जाती हैं .

iskō kahā jātā hai brāhmaṇpan kī|key natural nature , jismē̃ aur sab anēk janmō̃ kī|key natures samāpt hō jātī haĩ .

yah[pn.sg.kō] kahnā[pres.sg.m.23.past-part+jānā]|kahnā[pres.sg.m.23.passive] brāhmaṇpanā[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key natural nature[x] , jō[pn.sg.mē̃] aur sab[adj.] anēk[adj.] janm[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key nature samāpt[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.f.12hon3.root+jānā] .

⁸⁹You will not have to work hard for this. ⁹⁰This is known as the natural nature of a Brahmin, finishing other types of nature of many births.

⁷⁹

ब्राह्मण जीवन की नेचुरल नेचर है ही गुण स्वरूप , सर्व शक्ति स्वरूप और जो भी पुरानी नेचर्स हैं वह ब्राह्मण जीवन की नेचर्स नहीं हैं .

brāhmaṇ jīvan kī|key natural nature hai hī guṇ svarūp , sarv śhakti svarūp aur jō bhī purānī natures haĩ vah brāhmaṇ jīvan kī|key natures nahī̃ haĩ .

brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key natural nature[x] hōnā[pres.sg.23] hī[p.] guṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] , sarv[adj.] śhakti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur jō[pn.;d.] bhī[p.] purānā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] nature hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] vah[pn.sg.d.] brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key nature nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

Brahmin life (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) natural nature be[pres.sg.23] only virtue form , all Shakti form and that too old nature be[pres.pl.12hon3] that Brahmin life (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) nature not be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

⁹¹The natural nature of Brahmin life is to become an embodiment of virtues and an embodiment of all powers.

⁸⁰

कहते ऐसे हो कि मेरी नेचर ऐसी है लेकिन कौन बोलता है मेरी नेचर  ?

kahtē aisē hō ki mērī nature aisī hai lēkin kaun bōltā hai mērī nature  ?

kahnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] ki[conj.] maĩ[pn.sg.kī] nature aisā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin kaun[pn.;d.] bōlnā[pres.sg.m.23] maĩ[pn.sg.kī] nature  ?

say[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] such (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) that I[.kī] nature such be[pres.sg.23] but who speak[pres.sg.m.23] I[.kī] nature  ?

⁹²All the other types of nature are not the nature of Brahmin life.

⁸¹

ब्राह्मण वा क्षत्रिय  ?

brāhmaṇ vā kṣhatriya  ?

brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] vā kṣhatriya[n.m.;sg.,d.]  ?

Brahmin or x  ?

⁹³You say, “My nature is like this.”

⁸²

वा पास्ट जन्म के स्मृति स्वरूप आत्मा बोलती है  ?

vā past janm kē|K smr̥iti svarūp ātmā bōltī hai  ?

vā past janm[n.m.;sg.,d.]|janamnā[root] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K smr̥iti svarūp[x] ātmā[n.f.;sg.] bōlnā[pres.sg.f.23]  ?

or past (life|be born[root]) (of|K) x soul speak[pres.sg.f.23]  ?

⁹⁴But who is saying this? ⁹⁵Is it a Brahmin or a warrior?

⁸³

ब्राह्मणों की नेचर - जो ब्रह्मा बाप की नेचर वह ब्राह्मणों की नेचर .

brāhmaṇō̃ kī|key nature - jō brahmā bāp kī|key nature vah brāhmaṇō̃ kī|key nature .

⁹⁶Or, is it the soul that has become the embodiment of awareness of its previous birth, saying this?

⁸⁴

तो सोचो जिस समय कहते हो मेरी नेचर , मेरा स्वभाव ऐसा है , क्या ब्राह्मण जीवन में ऐसा शब्द - मेरी नेचर , मेरा स्वभाव … हो सकता है  ?

tō sōchō jis samay kahtē hō mērī nature , mērā svabhāv aisā hai , kyā brāhmaṇ jīvan mē̃ aisā śhabda - mērī nature , mērā svabhāv … hō saktā hai  ?

tō sōchnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] jis samay[x] kahnā[pres.pl.m.2] maĩ[pn.sg.kī] nature , maĩ[pn.sg.kā] svabhāv[n.m.;sg.,d.] aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , kyā brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] śhabd[n.m.;sg.,d.] - maĩ[pn.sg.kī] nature , maĩ[pn.sg.kā] svabhāv[n.m.;sg.,d.] … hōnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+saknā]  ?

then think[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] x say[pres.pl.m.2] I[.kī] nature , I[.kā] nature such be[pres.sg.23] , what Brahmin life in such word - I[.kī] nature , I[.kā] nature … be[pres.sg.m.23.root+saknā]  ?

⁹⁷The nature of Brahmins is the nature of Brahma Baba. ⁹⁸So, consider this: when you say, “My nature is like this”, can you have your own nature in Brahmin life?

⁸⁵

अगर अब तक मिटा रहे हो और पास्ट की नेचर इमर्ज हो जाती है तो समझना चाहिए इस समय मैं ब्राह्मण नहीं हूँ , क्षत्रिय हूँ , युद्ध कर रहा हूँ मिटाने की .

agar ab tak miṭā rahē hō aur past kī|key nature emerge hō jātī hai tō samajhnā chāhiē is samay maĩ brāhmaṇ nahī̃ hū̃ , kṣhatriya hū̃ , yuddha kar rahā hū̃ miṭānē kī|key .

agar ab[adv.] tak miṭānā[pres.pl.m.prog.2] aur past kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key nature emerge hōnā[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] tō samajhnā[imp.pl.2hon.inf+cāhnā]|samajhnā[.oblig3] is samay[x] maĩ[pn.sg.d.] brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.1] , kṣhatriya[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.1] , yuddh[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[pres.sg.m.prog.1] miṭānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key .

if now until x[pres.pl.m.prog.2] and past (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) nature emerge be[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] then (understand[imp.pl.2hon.inf+cāhnā]|understand[.oblig3]) at this time I Brahmin not be[pres.sg.1] , x be[pres.sg.1] , battle do[pres.sg.m.prog.1] x[inf.m.pl.,o.] (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) .

⁹⁹You have to understand that if you are still trying to finish your past nature, if the nature of your past still emerges, then you are not a Brahmin at that time, but a warrior; you are battling to finish the past.

⁸⁶

तो क्या कभी ब्राह्मण , कभी क्षत्रिय बन जाते हो  ?

tō kyā kabhī brāhmaṇ , kabhī kṣhatriya ban jātē hō  ?

tō kyā kabhī[adv.] brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] , kabhī[adv.] kṣhatriya[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[pres.pl.m.2.root+jānā]  ?

then what ever Brahmin , ever x become[pres.pl.m.2.root+jānā]  ?

¹⁰⁰So, are you sometimes Brahmins, and warriors at other times?

⁸⁷

कहलाते क्या हो  ?

kahlātē kyā hō  ?

kahlānā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] kyā hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2]  ?

call[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] what (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2])  ?

⁸⁸

क्षत्रिय कुमार या ब्रह्माकुमार  ?

kṣhatriya kumār yā brahmākumār  ?

kṣhatriya[n.m.;sg.,d.] kumār[x] yā brahmākumār[n.m.;sg.,d.]  ?

x kumar or Brahma Kumar  ?

¹⁰¹What do you call yourselves: a warrior kumar or a Brahma Kumar?

⁸⁹

कौन हो  ?

kaun hō  ?

kaun[pn.;d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2]  ?

who (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2])  ?

¹⁰²Who are you?

⁹⁰

क्षत्रिय कुमार हो क्या  ?

kṣhatriya kumār hō kyā  ?

kṣhatriya[n.m.;sg.,d.] kumār[x] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] kyā  ?

x kumar (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) what  ?

¹⁰³Are you a warrior kumar?

⁹¹

ब्रह्माकुमार , ब्रह्माकुमारियां .

brahmākumār , brahmākumāriyā̃ .

brahmākumār[n.m.;sg.,d.] , brahmākumārī[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] .

Brahma Kumar , Brahma Kumari .

¹⁰⁴You are Brahma Kumars and Brahma Kumaris.

⁹²

दूसरा नाम तो है ही नहीं .

dūsrā nām tō hai hī nahī̃ .

dūsrā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] nām[n.m.;sg.,d.] tō hōnā[pres.sg.23] hī[p.] nahī̃[neg] .

other name then be[pres.sg.23] only not .

¹⁰⁵You do not have any other name.

⁹³

कोई को ऐसे बुलाते हो क्या कि हे क्षत्रिय कुमार आओ  ?

kōī kō aisē bulātē hō kyā ki hē kṣhatriya kumār āō  ?

kōī[pn.;d.] kō[postp.] aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bulānā[pres.pl.m.2] kyā ki[conj.] hē kṣhatriya[n.m.;sg.,d.] kumār[x] ānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]  ?

some to such call[pres.pl.m.2] what that x x kumar come[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]  ?

¹⁰⁶Do you beckon anyone by saying, “Hey warrior kumar, come here”?

⁹⁴

ऐसा बोलते हो या अपने को कहते हो कि मैं ब्रह्माकुमार नहीं हूँ , मैं क्षत्रिय कुमार हूँ  ?

aisā bōltē hō yā apnē kō kahtē hō ki maĩ brahmākumār nahī̃ hū̃ , maĩ kṣhatriya kumār hū̃  ?

aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bōlnā[pres.pl.m.2] yā apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kō[postp.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.2] ki[conj.] maĩ[pn.sg.d.] brahmākumār[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.1] , maĩ[pn.sg.d.] kṣhatriya[n.m.;sg.,d.] kumār[x] hōnā[pres.sg.1]  ?

such speak[pres.pl.m.2] or one’s own to say[pres.pl.m.2] that I Brahma Kumar not be[pres.sg.1] , I x kumar be[pres.sg.1]  ?

¹⁰⁷Do you ever say this? ¹⁰⁸Or, do you tell yourself, “I am not a Brahma Kumar, I am a warrior kumar”.

⁹⁵

तो ब्राह्मण अर्थात् जो ब्रह्मा बाप की नेचर वह ब्राह्मणों की नेचर .

tō brāhmaṇ arthāt jō brahmā bāp kī|key nature vah brāhmaṇō̃ kī|key nature .

tō brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] arthāt jō[pn.;d.] brahmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key nature vah[pn.sg.d.] brāhmaṇ[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key nature .

then Brahmin that is that Brahma father (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) nature that Brahmin (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) nature .

¹⁰⁹To be a Brahmin means to have the same nature as Brahma Baba’s nature. ¹¹⁰Never say those words.

⁹⁶

यह शब्द अभी कभी नहीं बोलना , गलती से भी नहीं बोलना , न सोचना , क्या करूं मेरी नेचर है  !

yah śhabda abhī kabhī nahī̃ bōlnā , galatī|galtī sē bhī nahī̃ bōlnā , na sōchnā , kyā karū̃ mērī nature hai  !

yah[pn.sg.d.] śhabd[n.m.;sg.,d.] ab[adv.hī] kabhī[adv.] nahī̃[neg] bōlnā[inf.m.sg.d.] , galatī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.]|galnā[pres-part.f.] sē[postp.] bhī[p.] nahī̃[neg] bōlnā[inf.m.sg.d.] , na[neg] sōchnā[inf.m.sg.d.] , kyā karnā[opt.sg.1] maĩ[pn.sg.kī] nature hōnā[pres.sg.23]  !

this word now ever not speak[inf.m.sg.d.] , (mistake|x[pres-part.f.]) from too not speak[inf.m.sg.d.] , not think[inf.m.sg.d.] , what do[opt.sg.1] I[.kī] nature be[pres.sg.23]  !

¹¹¹Never say them even by mistake. ¹¹²Do not even think, “What can I do? ¹¹³My nature is like this”.

⁹⁷

यह बहानेबाजी है .

yah bahānēbājī hai .

yah[pn.sg.d.] bahānēbājī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

this x be[pres.sg.23] .

¹¹⁴This is making an excuse.

⁹⁸

यह कहना भी अपने को छुड़ाने का बहाना है .

yah kahnā bhī apnē kō chhuṛānē kā bahānā hai .

yah[pn.sg.d.] kahnā[inf.m.sg.d.] bhī[p.] apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kō[postp.] chhuṛānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bahānā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

this say[inf.m.sg.d.] too one’s own to free[inf.m.pl.,o.] of shed[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

¹¹⁵Even to say this is just making an excuse to free yourself.

⁹⁹

नया जन्म हुआ , नये जन्म में पुरानी नेचर , पुराना स्वभाव कहाँ से इमर्ज होता है  ?

nayā janm huā , nayē janm mē̃ purānī nature , purānā svabhāv kahā̃ sē emerge hōtā hai  ?

nayā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] janm[n.m.;sg.,d.]|janamnā[root] hōnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] , nayā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] janm[n.m.;sg.,d.]|janamnā[root] mē̃[postp.] purānā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] nature , purānā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] svabhāv[n.m.;sg.,d.] kahā̃ sē[postp.] emerge hōnā[pres.sg.m.23]  ?

new (life|be born[root]) be[past-part.m.sg.d.] , new (life|be born[root]) in old nature , old nature where from emerge be[pres.sg.m.23]  ?

¹¹⁶You have taken a new birth, and so how can your old nature emerge in your new life? ¹¹⁷It means you are not completely dead.

¹⁰⁰

तो पूरे मरे नहीं हैं , थोड़ा जिंदा हैं , थोड़ा मरे हैं क्या  ?

tō pūrē marē nahī̃ haĩ , thōṛā jindā haĩ , thōṛā marē haĩ kyā  ?

tō pūrā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] marnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|marnā[opt.sg.23] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] jindā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] marnā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] kyā  ?

then full (die[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|die[opt.sg.23]) not be[pres.pl.12hon3] , short x be[pres.pl.12hon3] , short die[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] what  ?

¹⁰¹

ब्राह्मण जीवन अर्थात् जो ब्रह्मा बाप का हर कदम है वह ब्राह्मणों का कदम हो .

brāhmaṇ jīvan arthāt jō brahmā bāp kā har|her kadam hai vah brāhmaṇō̃ kā kadam hō .

brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] arthāt jō[pn.;d.] brahmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] harnā[root]|har|her kadam[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] vah[pn.sg.d.] brāhmaṇ[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] kadam[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] .

Brahmin life that is that Brahma father of (x[root]|x) step be[pres.sg.23] that Brahmin of step (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

¹¹⁸You are still a little bit alive, and a bit of you has died. ¹¹⁹A Brahmin life means that the steps of Brahma Baba are the steps of Brahmins. ¹²⁰BapDada is watching your fortune, for it is such an elevated fortune.

¹⁰²

तो बापदादा भाग्य को भी देख रहे हैं और इतना श्रेष्ठ भाग्य , उस भाग्य के आगे यह बोल अच्छा नहीं होता .

tō bāpdādā bhāgya kō bhī dēkh rahē haĩ aur itnā śhrēṣhṭh bhāgya , us bhāgya kē āgē yah bōl achchhā nahī̃ hōtā .

tō bāpdādā bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] bhī[p.] dēkhnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] aur itnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] śhrēṣhṭha[adj.] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] , vah[pn.sg.o.] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] kē āgē[x] yah[pn.sg.d.] bōlnā[root]|bōl[n.m.;sg.,d.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] .

then BapDada x to too see[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] and such elevated x , that x in front of this (speak[root]|x) achcha not be[pres-part.m.sg.d.] .

¹²¹And so, these words do not seem right in front of this fortune. ¹²²You are celebrating this year as the Year of Liberation, are you not?

¹⁰³

इस बारी मुक्ति वर्ष मना रहे हो ना - क्या क्लास कराते हो  ?

is bārī mukti varṣh manā rahē hō nā - kyā class karātē hō  ?

yah[pn.sg.o.] bārī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] mukti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] manānā[pres.pl.m.prog.2] nā - kyā class karānā[pres.pl.m.2]  ?

this x liberation year celebrate[pres.pl.m.prog.2] ∅ - what class make commit[pres.pl.m.2]  ?

¹²³What classes do you give? ¹²⁴It is the Year of Liberation, the Year of Freedom.

¹⁰⁴

मुक्ति वर्ष है .

mukti varṣh hai .

mukti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

liberation year be[pres.sg.23] .

¹⁰⁵

तो मुक्ति वर्ष है या 99 में आना है  ?

tō mukti varṣh hai yā 99 mē̃ ānā hai  ?

tō mukti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] yā 99 mē̃[postp.] ānā[pres.sg.23.oblig1]  ?

then liberation year be[pres.sg.23] or 99 in come[pres.sg.23.oblig1]  ?

¹²⁵Is it now the Year of Liberation, or is that to come in 1999?

¹⁰⁶

98 का वर्ष मुक्ति वर्ष है  ?

98 kā varṣh mukti varṣh hai  ?

98 kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mukti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ?

98 of year liberation year be[pres.sg.23]  ?

¹²⁶The year 1998 is the Year of Liberation.

¹⁰⁷

जो समझते हैं यही वर्ष मुक्ति वर्ष है , वह हाथ हिलाओ .

jō samajhtē haĩ yahī varṣh mukti varṣh hai , vah hāth hilāō .

jō[pn.;d.] samajhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] yahī[pn.;d.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mukti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , vah[pn.sg.d.] hāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] hilānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

that understand[pres.pl.m.12hon3] this year liberation year be[pres.sg.23] , that hand make fluctuate[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

¹²⁷Those of you who think this is the Year of Liberation, raise your hands! ¹²⁸Look!

¹⁰⁸

देखो हाथ हिलाना बहुत सहज है .

dēkhō hāth hilānā bahut sahaj hai .

dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] hāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] hilānā[inf.m.sg.d.] bahut sahaj[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] hand make fluctuate[inf.m.sg.d.] very easy be[pres.sg.23] .

¹²⁹It is very easy to just raise your hand.

¹⁰⁹

होता क्या है  ?

hōtā kyā hai  ?

hōnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] kyā hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ?

be[pres-part.m.sg.d.] what be[pres.sg.23]  ?

¹¹⁰

वायुमण्डल में बैठे हो ना , खुशी में झूम रहे हो , तो हाथ हिला देते हो , लेकिन दिल से हाथ हिलाओ , प्रतिज्ञा करो - कुछ भी चला जाए लेकिन प्रतिज्ञा मुक्ति वर्ष की न जाए .

vāyumaṇḍal mē̃ baiṭhē hō nā , khuśhī mē̃ jhūm rahē hō , tō hāth hilā dētē hō , lēkin dil sē hāth hilāō , pratigyā karō - kuchh bhī chalā jāē lēkin pratigyā mukti varṣh kī|key na jāē .

vāyumaṇḍal[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] baiṭhnā[pres-perf.pl.m.2] nā , khuśhī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] mē̃[postp.] jhūmnā[pres.pl.m.prog.2] , tō hāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] hilānā[pres.pl.m.2.root+dēnā] , lēkin dil[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] hāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] hilānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , pratigyā[n.f.;sg.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] - kuchh bhī[x] chalnā[opt.sg.23.past-part+jānā]|chalānā[opt.sg.23.root+jānā]|chalnā[opt.sg.23.passive] lēkin pratigyā[n.f.;sg.] mukti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key na[neg] jānā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|jānā[opt.sg.23] .

atmosphere in sit[pres-perf.pl.m.2] ∅ , happiness in sway in happiness[pres.pl.m.prog.2] , then hand make fluctuate[pres.pl.m.2.root+dēnā] , but heart from hand make fluctuate[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , x do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] - anything (continue[opt.sg.23.past-part+jānā]|x[opt.sg.23.root+jānā]|continue[opt.sg.23.passive]) but x liberation year (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) not (go[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|go[opt.sg.23]) .

¹³⁰When you are sitting in this gathering and dancing in happiness, what happens is that you just raise your hand. ¹³¹Now, raise your hand and make this promise from your hear: No matter what it costs, you won't break your promise for the Year of Liberation.

¹¹¹

ऐसी पक्की प्रतिज्ञा है  ?

aisī pakkī pratigyā hai  ?

aisā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] pakkā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] pratigyā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ?

such firm x be[pres.sg.23]  ?

¹³²Have you made such a firm promise?

¹¹²

देखो सम्भालके हाथ उठाओ .

dēkhō sambhālkē hāth uṭhāō .

dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] sambhālnā[abs.] hāth uṭhānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] be careful[abs.] raise your hands .

¹³³Be careful when you raise your hand!

¹¹³

इस टी . वी . में आवे या न आवे , बापदादा के पास तो आपका चित्र निकल रहा है .

is T . we|V . mē̃ āvē yā na āvē , bāpdādā kē pās tō āpkā chitra nikal rahā hai .

yah[pn.sg.o.] T . we|V . mē̃[postp.] ānā[opt.sg.23] yā na[neg] ānā[opt.sg.23] , bāpdādā kē pās[x] tō āp[pn.pl.kā] chitra[n.m.;sg.,d.] nikalnā[pres.sg.m.prog.23] .

this x . (x) . in come[opt.sg.23] or not come[opt.sg.23] , BapDada to then you[.kā] picture be extracted[pres.sg.m.prog.23] .

¹³⁴Whether is is recorded on this TV or not, BapDada is having your photograph taken.

¹¹⁴

तो ऐसे-ऐसे कमजोर बोल से भी मुक्ति .

tō aisē-aisē kamjōr bōl sē bhī mukti .

tō aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kamjōr[adj.] bōlnā[root]|bōl[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] bhī[p.] mukti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] .

then such weak (speak[root]|x) from too liberation .

¹³⁵Therefore, become liberated from such weak words!

¹¹⁵

बोल ऐसे मधुर हो , बाप समान हो , सदा हर आत्मा के प्रति शुभ भावना के बोल हों , इसको कहा जाता है युक्तियुक्त बोल .

bōl aisē madhur hō , bāp samān hō , sadā har|her ātmā kē prati śhubh bhāvnā kē|K bōl hō̃ , iskō kahā jātā hai yuktiyukt bōl .

¹³⁶Your words should be as sweet as the Father's. ¹³⁷Your words to every soul should be filled with good wishes. ¹³⁸This is known as words filled with significance.

¹¹⁶

साधारण बोल भी चलते-फिरते होना नहीं चाहिए .

sādhāraṇ bōl bhī chaltē-phirtē hōnā nahī̃ chāhiē .

sādhāraṇ[adj.] bōlnā[root]|bōl[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] chaltā-phirtā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] chāhiē|chāhnā[imp.pl.2hon] .

ordinary (speak[root]|x) too mobile be[inf.m.sg.d.] not (should|x[imp.pl.2hon]) .

¹³⁹You should not speak ordinary words whilst walking and moving around.

¹¹⁷

कोई भी अचानक आ जाए तो ऐसा ही अनुभव करे कि यह बोल हैं या मोती हैं .

kōī bhī achānak ā jāē tō aisā hī anubhav karē ki yah bōl haĩ yā mōtī haĩ .

kōī bhī[x] achānak ānā[opt.sg.23.root+jānā] tō aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hī[p.] anubhav[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[opt.sg.23] ki[conj.] yah[pn.sg.d.] bōlnā[root]|bōl[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] yā mōtī[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

anyone suddenly come[opt.sg.23.root+jānā] then such only experience do[opt.sg.23] that this (speak[root]|x) be[pres.pl.12hon3] or pearl be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

¹⁴⁰Anyone who suddenly comes to you should wonder whether these are words or pearls.

¹¹⁸

शुभ भावना के बोल हीरे मोती समान हैं क्योंकि बापदादा ने कई बार यह इशारा दे दिया है कि समय प्रमाण अभी थोड़ा सा समय है सर्व खज़ाने जमा करने का .

śhubh bhāvnā kē|K bōl hīrē mōtī samān haĩ kyōṅki bāpdādā nē kaī bār yah iśhārā dē diyā hai ki samay pramāṇ abhī thōṛā sā samay hai sarv khazānē jamā karnē kā .

śhubh bhāvnā[x] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K bōlnā[root]|bōl[n.m.;sg.,d.] hīrā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] mōtī[n.m.;sg.,d.] samān[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] kyōṅki bāpdādā nē[postp.] kaī bār[n.f.;sg.] yah[pn.sg.d.] iśhārā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] dēnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23.root+dēnā] ki[conj.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] pramāṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.]|pramāṇ ab[adv.hī] thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] sā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] sarv[adj.] khajānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] jamā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|jamnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]|jamānā[root] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] .

pure feeling (of|K) (speak[root]|x) diamond pearl equal be[pres.pl.12hon3] because BapDada ∅ some time this signal give[pres-perf.sg.m.23.root+dēnā] that time (under) now short x time be[pres.sg.23] all treasure (accumulation|x[past-part.m.sg.d.]|make firm[root]) do[inf.m.pl.,o.] of .

¹⁴¹Words filled with good wishes are like diamonds and pearls. ¹⁴²BapDada has indicated many times, that there is now very little time remaining for you to accumulate all the treasures.

¹¹⁹

अगर इस समय में - समय का खज़ाना , संकल्प का खज़ाना , बोल का खज़ाना , ज्ञान धन का खज़ाना , योग की शक्तियों का खज़ाना , दिव्य जीवन के सर्व गुणों का खज़ाना जमा नहीं किया तो फिर ऐसा जमा करने का समय मिलना सहज नहीं होगा .

agar is samay mē̃ - samay kā khazānā , saṅkalp kā khazānā , bōl kā khazānā , gyān dhan kā khazānā , yōg kī|key śhaktiyō̃ kā khazānā , divya jīvan kē|K sarv guṇō̃ kā khazānā jamā nahī̃ kiyā tō phir aisā jamā karnē kā samay milnā sahaj nahī̃ hōgā .

agar is samay[x] mē̃[postp.] - samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] khajānā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] , saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] khajānā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] , bōlnā[root]|bōl[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] khajānā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] , gyān[n.m.;sg.,d.] dhan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] khajānā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] , yōg[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key śhakti[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] khajānā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] , divya[adj.] jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sarv[adj.] guṇ[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] khajānā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] jamā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|jamnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]|jamānā[root] nahī̃[neg] karnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] tō phir[adv.]|phirnā[root] aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] jamā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|jamnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]|jamānā[root] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] milnā[inf.m.sg.d.] sahaj[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] .

if at this time in - time of treasure , thought of treasure , (speak[root]|x) of treasure , knowledge wealth of treasure , yoga (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) Shakti of treasure , divine life (of|K) all virtue of treasure (accumulation|x[past-part.m.sg.d.]|make firm[root]) not do[past-part.m.sg.d.] then (then|turn[root]) such (accumulation|x[past-part.m.sg.d.]|make firm[root]) do[inf.m.pl.,o.] of time receive[inf.m.sg.d.] easy not be[fut.m.sg.23] .

¹⁴³If you don't accumulate all the treasures of time, thoughts, words, the wealth of knowledge, the powers of yoga the treasures of all virtues of a life of divinity at this time, you won't find another time easily to accumulate all these treasures. ¹⁴⁴Throughout the entire day, check your account of each treasure.

¹²⁰

सारे दिन में अपने इन एक-एक खज़ाने का एकाउण्ट चेक करो .

sārē din mē̃ apnē in ēk-ēk khazānē kā account check karō .

sārā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] din[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] in|yah[pn.pl.o.] ēk[adj.] khajānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] account check karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

the whole day in one’s own (in|this) one treasure of account check do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

¹²¹

जैसे स्थूल धन का एकाउण्ट चेक करते हो ना , इतना जमा है … ऐसे हर खज़ाने का एकाउण्ट जमा करो .

jaisē sthūl dhan kā account check kartē hō nā , itnā jamā hai … aisē har|her khazānē kā account jamā karō .

jaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sthūl[adj.] dhan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] account check karnā[pres.pl.m.2] nā , itnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] jamnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] … aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] harnā[root]|har|her khajānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] account jamā karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

like physical wealth of account check do[pres.pl.m.2] ∅ , such x[pres-perf.sg.m.23] … such (x[root]|x) treasure of account accumulate .

¹⁴⁵Just as you check your account of physical money to see how much you are in credit, so too, examine each account of treasure to see how much treasure you have accumulated.

¹²²

चेक करो .

check karō .

check karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

check do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

¹²³

सर्व खज़ाने चाहिए .

sarv khazānē chāhiē .

sarv[adj.] khajānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] chāhiē|chāhnā[imp.pl.2hon] .

all treasure (should|x[imp.pl.2hon]) .

¹⁴⁶You need to have all the treasures.

¹²⁴

अगर पास विद आनर बनने चाहते हो तो हर खज़ाने का जमा खाता इतना ही भरपूर चाहिए जो 21 जन्म जमा हुए खाते से प्रालब्ध भोग सको .

agar pass with honour bannē chāhtē hō tō har|her khazānē kā jamā khātā itnā hī bharpūr chāhiē jō 21 janm jamā huē khātē sē prālabdh bhōg sakō .

agar pass with honour[x] bannā[inf.m.pl.,o.] chāhnā[pres.pl.m.2] tō harnā[root]|har|her khajānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] jamā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|jamnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]|jamānā[root] khānā[pres-part.m.sg.d.]|khātā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] itnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hī[p.] bharpūr[adj.] chāhiē|chāhnā[imp.pl.2hon] jō[pn.;d.] 21 janm[n.m.;sg.,d.]|janamnā[root] jamā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|jamnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]|jamānā[root] hōnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] khātā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.]|khānā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] sē[postp.] prālabdh[n.f.;sg.] bhōgnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+saknā] .

¹⁴⁷If you wish to pass with honour, the account of accumulation of every treasure should be so full that you will be able to experience the fruit of that accumulated account of treasure for twentyone births.

¹²⁵

अभी समय के टू लेट की घण्टी नहीं बजी है , लेकिन बजने वाली है .

abhī samay kē|K too late kī|key ghaṇṭī nahī̃ bajī hai , lēkin bajnē vālī hai .

ab[adv.hī] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K too late[x] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key ghaṇṭī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] nahī̃[neg] bajnā[pres-perf.sg.f.23] , lēkin bajnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

now time (of|K) too late (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) ringing of the bell not x[pres-perf.sg.f.23] , but x[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who be[pres.sg.23] .

¹⁴⁸The “too late” bell of time has not yet chimed but they will chime.

¹²⁶

दिन और डेट नहीं बतायेंगे .

din aur date nahī̃ batāyēṅgē .

din[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur date nahī̃[neg] batānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

day and date not tell[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

¹²⁷

अचानक ही आउट होगा - टू लेट .

achānak hī out hōgā - too late .

achānak hī[p.] out hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] - too late[x] .

suddenly only out be[fut.m.sg.23] - too late .

¹⁴⁹You will not be told the day or date in advance; it will be announced suddenly too late.

¹²⁸

फिर क्या करेंगे  ?

phir kyā karē̃gē  ?

phir[adv.]|phirnā[root] kyā karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

(then|turn[root]) what do[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

¹⁵⁰What will you do then?

¹²⁹

उस समय जमा करेंगे  ?

us samay jamā karē̃gē  ?

vah[pn.sg.o.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] jamā karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

that time accumulate  ?

¹⁵¹Will you be able to accumulate at that time?

¹³⁰

कितना भी चाहो समय नहीं मिलेगा .

kitnā bhī chāhō samay nahī̃ milēgā .

kitnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhī[p.] chāhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] milnā[fut.m.sg.23] .

so too x[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] time not receive[fut.m.sg.23] .

¹⁵²No matter how much you wish, you will not have the time.

¹³¹

इसलिए बापदादा कई बार इशारा दे रहा है - जमा करो-जमा करो-जमा करो .

isliē bāpdādā kaī bār iśhārā dē rahā hai - jamā karō-jamā karō-jamā karō .

isliē bāpdādā kaī bār[n.f.;sg.] iśhārā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] dēnā[pres.sg.m.prog.23] - jamā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|jamnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]|jamānā[root] x x karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

therefore BapDada some time signal give[pres.sg.m.prog.23] - (accumulation|x[past-part.m.sg.d.]|make firm[root]) x x do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

¹⁵³This is why BapDada gives you this signal many times: Accumulate! ¹⁵⁴Accumulate!

¹³²

क्योंकि आपका अभी भी टाइटिल है - सर्वशक्तिमान , शक्तिवान नहीं है , सर्वशक्तिमान .

kyōṅki āpkā abhī bhī title hai - sarvśhaktimān , śhaktivān nahī̃ hai , sarvśhaktimān .

kyōṅki āp[pn.pl.kā] ab[adv.hī] bhī[p.] title hōnā[pres.sg.23] - sarvśhaktimān[adj.] , śhaktivān[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , sarvśhaktimān[adj.] .

because you[.kā] now too title be[pres.sg.23] - almighty authorities , x not be[pres.sg.23] , almighty authorities .

¹⁵⁵Accumulate! ¹⁵⁶Your title of this time is “One with all powers”. ¹⁵⁷It is not just “One with some powers”.

¹³³

भविष्य में भी है सर्वगुण सम्पन्न , सिर्फ गुण सम्पन्न नहीं है .

bhaviṣhya mē̃ bhī hai sarvguṇ sampann , sirph guṇ sampann nahī̃ hai .

bhaviṣhya[adj.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] sarvguṇ sampann[x] , sirph[adj.] guṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] sampann[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

future in too be[pres.sg.23] full of all virtues , only virtue full not be[pres.sg.23] .

¹⁵⁸In the future, you will also be full of all virtues, not just full of some virtues.

¹³⁴

यह खज़ाने जमा करना अर्थात् गुण और शक्तियां जमा हो रही हैं .

yah khazānē jamā karnā arthāt guṇ aur śhaktiyā̃ jamā hō rahī haĩ .

yah[pn.sg.d.] khajānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] jamā karnā[x] arthāt guṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur śhakti[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] jamnā[x] rahnā[pres-perf.pl.f.12hon3] .

this treasure accumulate that is virtue and Shakti x[x] remain[pres-perf.pl.f.12hon3] .

¹⁵⁹You have to accumulate all these treasures now; you have to accumulate all virtues and powers now.

¹³⁵

एक एक खज़ाने का गुण और शक्ति से सम्बन्ध है .

ēk ēk khazānē kā guṇ aur śhakti sē sambandh hai .

ēk[adj.] ēk[adj.] khajānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] guṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur śhakti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] sē[postp.] sambandh[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

one one treasure of virtue and Shakti from relationship be[pres.sg.23] .

¹⁶⁰Each and every treasure is connected with a virtue or power.

¹³⁶

जैसे साधारण बोल नहीं तो मधुर भाषी , यह गुण है .

jaisē sādhāraṇ bōl nahī̃ tō madhur bhāṣhī , yah guṇ hai .

jaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sādhāraṇ[adj.] bōlnā[root]|bōl[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃ tō[x] madhur[adj.] bhāṣhī[adj.] , yah[pn.sg.d.] guṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

like ordinary (speak[root]|x) otherwise sweet language , this virtue be[pres.sg.23] .

¹⁶¹Just as you don’t speak ordinary words, but have the virtue of speaking sweet words.

¹³⁷

ऐसे हर एक खज़ाने का कनेक्शन है .

aisē har ēk khazānē kā connection hai .

aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] har ēk[x] khajānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] connection hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

such each one treasure of connection be[pres.sg.23] .

¹⁶²Similarly, each and every treasure has this connection.

¹³⁸

बापदादा का बच्चों से प्यार है इसलिए फिर भी बार-बार इशारा दे रहे हैं क्योंकि आज की सभा में सब वैरायटी हैं .

bāpdādā kā bachchō̃ sē pyār hai isliē phir bhī bār-bār iśhārā dē rahē haĩ kyōṅki āj kī|key sabhā mē̃ sab variety haĩ .

bāpdādā kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] isliē phir bhī[x] bār[n.f.;sg.] iśhārā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] kyōṅki āj kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key sabhā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] sab[adj.] variety hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

BapDada of child from love be[pres.sg.23] therefore nevertheless time signal give[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] because today (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) court in all variety be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

¹⁶³Because BapDada loves you children, He gives you this signal again and again. ¹⁶⁴In today’s gathering, there are all varieties.

¹³⁹

छोटे बच्चे भी हैं , टीचर्स भी हैं क्योंकि टीचर्स ही तो समर्पण हुई हैं .

chhōṭē bachchē bhī haĩ , teachers bhī haĩ kyōṅki teachers hī tō samarpaṇ huī haĩ .

chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , teacher bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] kyōṅki teacher hī[p.] tō samarpaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres-perf.pl.f.12hon3] .

small child too be[pres.pl.12hon3] , teacher too be[pres.pl.12hon3] because teacher only then surrender be[pres-perf.pl.f.12hon3] .

¹⁴⁰

कुमारियां भी हैं , प्रवृत्ति वाले भी हैं .

kumāriyā̃ bhī haĩ , pravr̥itti vālē bhī haĩ .

kumārī[x] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , pravr̥itti[n.f.;sg.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

kumari too be[pres.pl.12hon3] , famille those who too be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

¹⁶⁵There are the small children and also teachers; there are many surrendered teachers; there are kumaris and householders as well.

¹⁴¹

सब वैरायटी हैं .

sab variety haĩ .

sab[adj.] variety hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

all variety be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

¹⁶⁶There are all varieties.

¹⁴²

अच्छा है .

achchhā hai .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

achcha be[pres.sg.23] .

¹⁴³

सभी को चांस दिया है , यह बहुत अच्छा है .

sabhī kō chance diyā hai , yah bahut achchhā hai .

sab[adv.hī] kō[postp.] chance dēnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] , yah[pn.sg.d.] bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

all to chance give[pres-perf.sg.m.23] , this very achcha be[pres.sg.23] .

¹⁶⁷It is good that everyone has been given a chance. ¹⁶⁸This is very good.

¹⁴⁴

बच्चों की तो काफी समय से अर्जी थी .

bachchō̃ kī|key tō kāphī samay sē arjī thī .

bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key tō kāphī[adj.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] arjī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] hōnā[past.f] .

child (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) then enough time from x be[past.f] .

¹⁶⁹Children made a request a long time ago, didn’t you?

¹⁴⁵

थी ना बच्चे  ?

thī nā bachchē  ?

hōnā[past.f] nā bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.]  ?

be[past.f] ∅ child  ?

¹⁴⁶

हमको मिलने का चांस कब मिलेगा  ?

hamkō milnē kā chance kab milēgā  ?

ham[pn.pl.kō] milnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] chance kab milnā[fut.m.sg.23]  ?

we[.kō] receive[inf.m.pl.,o.] of chance when receive[fut.m.sg.23]  ?

¹⁷⁰You asked, “When will we get the chance to meet Baba?”

¹⁴⁷

तो अच्छा हुआ - सर्व वैरायटी का गुलदस्ता बाप के सामने है .

tō achchhā huā - sarv variety kā guldastā bāp kē|K sāmnē hai .

tō achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] - sarv[adj.] variety kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] guldastā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sāmnē hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

then achcha be[past-part.m.sg.d.] - all variety of bouquet father (of|K) x be[pres.sg.23] .

¹⁷¹So, it is good! ¹⁷²A bouquet of all varieties is in front of Baba.

¹⁴⁸

तो बच्चे हाथ उठाओ .

tō bachchē hāth uṭhāō .

tō bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] hāth uṭhānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

then child raise your hands .

¹⁷³So children, raise your hands!

¹⁴⁹

बच्चों से तो बड़ों का प्यार होता ही है .

bachchō̃ sē tō baṛō̃ kā pyār hōtā hī hai .

bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] tō baṛā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

child from then very of love be[pres-part.m.sg.d.] only be[pres.sg.23] .

¹⁷⁴The elders have love for children, so Baba also has love for children.

¹⁵⁰

तो बाप से भी बच्चों का प्यार है और सभी बच्चे आज के ब्राह्मण हैं कल के क्या बनेंगे  ?

tō bāp sē bhī bachchō̃ kā pyār hai aur sabhī bachchē āj kē|K brāhmaṇ haĩ kal kē|K kyā banē̃gē  ?

tō bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] bhī[p.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] aur sab[adv.hī] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] āj kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] kal kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K kyā bannā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

then father from too child of love be[pres.sg.23] and all child today (of|K) Brahmin be[pres.pl.12hon3] x (of|K) what become[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

¹⁷⁵All of you children are Brahmins today, but what will you become tomorrow? ¹⁷⁶Speak children!

¹⁵¹

बोलो बच्चे , कल क्या बनेंगे  ?

bōlō bachchē , kal kyā banē̃gē  ?

bōlnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] , kal kyā bannā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

speak[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] child , x what become[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

¹⁷⁷What you will become tomorrow?

¹⁵²

( देवता बनेंगे ) अच्छा , कौन सा देवता बनेंगे , पता है  ?

( dēvtā banē̃gē ) achchhā , kaun sā dēvtā banē̃gē , patā hai  ?

( dēvtā bannā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] ) achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] , kaun sā[x] dēvtā bannā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , patā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ?

( become deity ) achcha , which become deity , knowledge be[pres.sg.23]  ?

¹⁷⁸(Deities.) ¹⁷⁹Achcha, do you know which deities you will become?

¹⁵³

बच्चों में से कोई देवी नहीं बनेगा , सब देवता बनेंगे  ?

bachchō̃ mē̃ sē kōī dēvī nahī̃ banēgā , sab dēvtā banē̃gē  ?

bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] mē̃[postp.] sē[postp.] kōī[pn.;d.] dēvī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] nahī̃[neg] bannā[fut.m.sg.23] , sab[adj.] dēvtā bannā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

child in from some goddess not become[fut.m.sg.23] , all become deity  ?

¹⁸⁰Will none of you become female deities? ¹⁸¹Will all of you become male deities?

¹⁵⁴

अच्छा है , बच्चों से रौनक होती है .

achchhā hai , bachchō̃ sē raunak hōtī hai .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] raunak[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] .

achcha be[pres.sg.23] , child from splendour be[pres.sg.f.23] .

¹⁸²It is good! ¹⁸³There is a great splendour with the children.

¹⁵⁵

तो आपकी रौनक को देख यह सभी खुश हो रहे हैं , वाह बच्चे वाह  !

tō āpkī raunak kō dēkh yah sabhī khuśh hō rahē haĩ , vāh bachchē vāh  !

tō āp[pn.pl.kī] raunak[n.f.;sg.] kō[postp.] dēkhnā[root] yah[pn.sg.d.] sab[adv.hī] khuśh[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] , vāh bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] vāh  !

then you[.kī] splendour to see[root] this all happy be[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] , wah! child wah!  !

¹⁸⁴All of these people become very happy when they see your splendour. ¹⁸⁵Wah children!

¹⁵⁶

लेकिन एक बात याद रखना - बच्चे , ब्राह्मण आत्मायें बच्चे , तो जो बड़ों का भाग्य है ना वह बच्चों का भी भाग्य है इसलिए बाप के साथ को कभी नहीं भूलना .

lēkin ēk bāt yād rakhnā - bachchē , brāhmaṇ ātmāyē̃ bachchē , tō jō baṛō̃ kā bhāgya hai nā vah bachchō̃ kā bhī bhāgya hai isliē bāp kē sāth kō kabhī nahī̃ bhūlnā .

lēkin ēk[adj.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] yād rakhnā[x] - bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] , brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] , tō jō[pn.;d.] baṛā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā vah[pn.sg.d.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhī[p.] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] isliē bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kē sāth[x] kō[postp.] kabhī[adv.] nahī̃[neg] bhūlnā[inf.m.sg.d.] .

but one matter remember - child , Brahmin soul child , then that very of x be[pres.sg.23] ∅ that child of too x be[pres.sg.23] therefore father with to ever not forget[inf.m.sg.d.] .

¹⁸⁶Wah! ¹⁸⁷However, just remember something. ¹⁸⁸Children, you children who are Brahmin souls, whatever is in the fortune of the elders is also in the fortune of you children. ¹⁸⁹Therefore, never forget the Father’s company!

¹⁵⁷

चाहे कितना भी माया की अट्रैक्शन हो लेकिन बाप को नहीं भूलना .

chāhē kitnā bhī māyā kī|key attraction hō lēkin bāp kō nahī̃ bhūlnā .

¹⁹⁰No matter how much attraction Maya has, do not forget the Father!

¹⁵⁸

अच्छा सभी बच्चे रोज़ क्लास में जाते हैं या सण्डे-सण्डे जाते हैं  ?

achchhā sabhī bachchē rōz class mē̃ jātē haĩ yā Sunday-Sunday jātē haĩ  ?

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] sab[adv.hī] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] rōz class mē̃[postp.] jānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] yā Sunday jānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3]  ?

achcha all child day class in go[pres.pl.m.12hon3] or Sunday go[pres.pl.m.12hon3]  ?

¹⁹¹Achcha. ¹⁹²Are there such children here amongst you who go to class every day?

¹⁵⁹

( रोज़ क्लास में जाने वालों ने हाथ उठाया ) यह रोज़ जाने वाले हैं .

( rōz class mē̃ jānē vālō̃ nē hāth uṭhāyā ) yah rōz jānē vālē haĩ .

( rōz class mē̃[postp.] jānnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|jānā[inf.m.pl.,o.]|jānnā[opt.sg.23] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] nē[postp.] hāth uṭhānā[past-part.m.sg.d.] ) yah[pn.sg.d.] rōz jānnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|jānā[inf.m.pl.,o.]|jānnā[opt.sg.23] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

( day class in (know[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|go[inf.m.pl.,o.]|know[opt.sg.23]) those who ∅ raise your hands ) this day (know[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|go[inf.m.pl.,o.]|know[opt.sg.23]) those who be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

¹⁹³Do you go every day, or only on Sundays? ¹⁹⁴Achcha, you go to class every day.

¹⁶⁰

बहुत हैं .

bahut haĩ .

bahut hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

very be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

¹⁹⁵There are many of you.

¹⁶¹

अच्छा - टी . वी . देखते हो  ?

achchhā - T . we|V . dēkhtē hō  ?

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] - T . we|V . dēkhnā[pres.pl.m.2]  ?

achcha - x . (x) . see[pres.pl.m.2]  ?

¹⁹⁶Achcha. ¹⁹⁷Do you watch TV?

¹⁶²

सभी हँसते हैं .

sabhī hanstē haĩ .

sab[adv.hī] hãsnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

all laugh out[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

¹⁹⁸Everyone is laughing.

¹⁶³

देखो , अगर अच्छी बातें देखते हो तो ठीक है लेकिन बुरी बातें भी देखते हो तो ठीक नहीं है .

dēkhō , agar achchhī bātē̃ dēkhtē hō tō ṭhīk hai lēkin burī bātē̃ bhī dēkhtē hō tō ṭhīk nahī̃ hai .

dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , agar achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] bāt[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] dēkhnā[pres.pl.m.2] tō ṭhīk[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin burā[adj.ā=>ī;f.]|burī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] bāt[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] bhī[p.] dēkhnā[pres.pl.m.2] tō ṭhīk[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , if achcha matter see[pres.pl.m.2] then OK be[pres.sg.23] but (bad|x) matter too see[pres.pl.m.2] then OK not be[pres.sg.23] .

¹⁹⁹If you watch good things, that is OK, but if you also watch bad programmes, that is not good.

¹⁶⁴

आज बुरी बातें न देखने का संकल्प कर लो कि हम कभी अगर टी . वी . देख भी रहे हैं और कोई बुरी बात आ जाती है तो बन्द कर देंगे .

āj burī bātē̃ na dēkhnē kā saṅkalp kar lō ki ham kabhī agar T . we|V . dēkh bhī rahē haĩ aur kōī burī bāt ā jātī hai tō band kar dēgē .

āj burā[adj.ā=>ī;f.]|burī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] bāt[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] na[neg] dēkhnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+lēnā] ki[conj.] ham[pn.pl.] kabhī[adv.] agar T . we|V . dēkhnā[root] bhī[p.] rahnā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] aur kōī[x] burā[adj.ā=>ī;f.]|burī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] ānā[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] tō band[adj.] karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+dēnā] .

today (bad|x) matter not see[inf.m.pl.,o.] of thought do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+lēnā] that we ever if x . (x) . see[root] too remain[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] someone else (bad|x) matter come[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] then closed do[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+dēnā] .

²⁰⁰Today, have the thought of not watching bad programmes; that even if you are watching TV and something bad comes on, you will switch it off.

¹⁶⁵

कर सकते हो  ?

kar saktē hō  ?

karnā[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā]  ?

do[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā]  ?

²⁰¹Are you able to do this?

¹⁶⁶

जो बुरी बातें टी . वी . में नहीं देखते हैं वह हाथ उठाओ .

jō burī bātē̃ T . we|V . mē̃ nahī̃ dēkhtē haĩ vah hāth uṭhāō .

jō[pn.;d.] burā[adj.ā=>ī;f.]|burī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] bāt[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] T . we|V . mē̃[postp.] nahī̃[neg] dēkhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] vah[pn.sg.d.] hāth uṭhānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

that (bad|x) matter x . (x) . in not see[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that raise your hands .

²⁰²Those who do not watch bad programmes, raise your hands!

¹⁶⁷

बहुत कम हैं .

bahut kam|cum haĩ .

bahut kam[adj.]|cum hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

very (less|x) be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

²⁰³There are very few of you.

¹⁶⁸

बच्चों का टीचर कौन है  ?

bachchō̃ kā teacher kaun hai  ?

bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] teacher kaun[pn.;d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ?

child of teacher who be[pres.sg.23]  ?

²⁰⁴Who are the children’s teachers?

¹⁶⁹

तो सभी टीचर्स बच्चों का चार्ट देखना .

tō sabhī teachers bachchō̃ kā chart dēkhnā .

tō sab[adv.hī] teacher bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] chart dēkhnā[inf.m.sg.d.] .

then all teacher child of chart see[inf.m.sg.d.] .

¹⁷⁰

सभी बच्चे मुक्ति वर्ष मनायेंगे  ?

sabhī bachchē mukti varṣh manāyēṅgē  ?

sab[adv.hī] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] mukti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] manānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

all child liberation year celebrate[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

²⁰⁵All you teachers, make sure that the children also celebrate the Year of Liberation.

¹⁷¹

सच्ची दिल से हाथ उठाओ .

sachchī dil sē hāth uṭhāō .

sachchā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] dil[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] hāth uṭhānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

true heart from raise your hands .

²⁰⁶Raise your hands with an honest heart!

¹⁷²

अच्छा .

achchhā .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] .

achcha .

²⁰⁷Achcha.

¹⁷³

देखो दादियों ने आपको चांस दिया है तो दादियों को शुक्रिया किया  ?

dēkhō dādiyō̃ nē āpkō chance diyā hai tō dādiyō̃ kō śhukriyā kiyā  ?

dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] dādī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] nē[postp.] āp[pn.pl.kō] chance dēnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] tō dādī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] śhukriyā karnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]  ?

see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] Dadi ∅ you[.kō] chance give[pres-perf.sg.m.23] then Dadi to Shukriya do[past-part.m.sg.d.]  ?

²⁰⁸Look! ²⁰⁹The Dadis have given you a chance, and so, have you said thanks to the Dadis?

¹⁷⁴

किया या नहीं  ?

kiyā yā nahī̃  ?

karnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] yā nahī̃[neg]  ?

do[past-part.m.sg.d.] or not  ?

²¹⁰Yes or no?

¹⁷⁵

चलो किया तो बहुत अच्छा लेकिन कल दादियों को प्यार से शुक्रिया करना और दादियों ने चांस दिया है ना तो यह प्रतिज्ञा करना कि हम भी मुक्ति वर्ष मनायेंगे .

chalō kiyā tō bahut achchhā lēkin kal dādiyō̃ kō pyār sē śhukriyā karnā aur dādiyō̃ nē chance diyā hai nā tō yah pratigyā karnā ki ham bhī mukti varṣh manāyēṅgē .

chalnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] karnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] tō bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] lēkin kal dādī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] śhukriyā karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] aur dādī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] nē[postp.] chance dēnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] nā tō yah[pn.sg.d.] pratigyā[n.f.;sg.] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] ki[conj.] ham[pn.pl.] bhī[p.] mukti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] manānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

continue[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] do[past-part.m.sg.d.] then very achcha but x Dadi to love from Shukriya do[inf.m.sg.d.] and Dadi ∅ chance give[pres-perf.sg.m.23] ∅ then this x do[inf.m.sg.d.] that we too liberation year celebrate[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

²¹¹If you have said thanks, then that is very good. ²¹²Otherwise, say thanks to the Dadis tomorrow with a lot of love. ²¹³The Dadis have given you a chance, and so promise that you will also celebrate the Year of Liberation.

¹⁷⁶

लड़ना नहीं , जोश नहीं करना , क्रोध नहीं करना .

laṛnā nahī̃ , jōśh nahī̃ karnā , krōdh nahī̃ karnā .

laṛnā[inf.m.sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] , jōśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] , krōdh[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] .

fight[inf.m.sg.d.] not , x not do[inf.m.sg.d.] , anger not do[inf.m.sg.d.] .

²¹⁴Do not fight! ²¹⁵Do not become forceful! ²¹⁶Do not get angry!

¹⁷⁷

बापदादा जानते हैं - कई छोटे-छोटे बच्चे बड़ों से भी प्रतिज्ञा में आगे जाते हैं .

bāpdādā jāntē haĩ - kaī chhōṭē-chhōṭē bachchē baṛō̃ sē bhī pratigyā mē̃ āgē jātē haĩ .

bāpdādā jānnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] - kaī chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] baṛā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] bhī[p.] pratigyā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] āgē jānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

BapDada know[pres.pl.m.12hon3] - some small child very from too x in previously go[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

²¹⁷BapDada knows that many young children go far ahead of their elders. ²¹⁸So, all of you should go ahead and reveal yourselves.

¹⁷⁸

तो सभी आगे जाकर दिखाना .

tō sabhī āgē jākar dikhānā .

tō sab[adv.hī] āgē jānā[abs.] dikhānā[inf.m.sg.d.] .

then all previously go[abs.] x[inf.m.sg.d.] .

²¹⁹Achcha, now stand up! ²²⁰It is good.

¹⁷⁹

अच्छा है बच्चों की महफिल भी अच्छी है .

achchhā hai bachchō̃ kī|key mahaphil bhī achchhī hai .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key mahphil[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

achcha be[pres.sg.23] child (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) x too achcha be[pres.sg.23] .

¹⁸⁰

अच्छा .

achchhā .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] .

achcha .

²²¹The gathering of children is also very good.

¹⁸¹

दूसरा ग्रुप है कुमारियों का - कुमारियां बहुत हैं .

dūsrā group hai kumāriyō̃ kā - kumāriyā̃ bahut haĩ .

dūsrā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] group hōnā[pres.sg.23] kumārī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] - kumārī[x] bahut hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

other group be[pres.sg.23] kumari of - kumari very be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

²²²The second group is the kumaris. ²²³There are many kumaris.

¹⁸²

( करीब 2000 कुमारियां आई हैं ) अच्छा है कुमारियों ने हिम्मत रखी है .

( karīb 2000 kumāriyā̃ āī haĩ ) achchhā hai kumāriyō̃ nē himmat rakhī hai .

( karīb 2000 kumārī[x] ānā[pres-perf.pl.f.12hon3] ) achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] kumārī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] nē[postp.] himmat[n.m.;sg.,d.] rakhnā[pres-perf.sg.f.23] .

( nearly 2000 kumari come[pres-perf.pl.f.12hon3] ) achcha be[pres.sg.23] kumari ∅ courage keep[pres-perf.sg.f.23] .

²²⁴All kumaris, stand up! ²²⁵(2000). ²²⁶It is good that the kumaris have had courage.

¹⁸³

कुमारियों के लिए तो बापदादा सदा ही लक्की कुमारी जीवन कहते हैं .

kumāriyō̃ kē liē tō bāpdādā sadā hī lucky kumārī jīvan kahtē haĩ .

kumārī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kē liē[x] tō bāpdādā sadā hī[p.] lucky kumārī[x] jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

kumari for then BapDada constantly only lucky kumari life say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

²²⁷Baba always says that kumaris are those who have a lucky kumari life.

¹⁸⁴

देखो कुमार कहते हैं कि कुमारी अगर टीचर बनती हैं , सेन्टर पर जाती हैं तो कुमारी जाते ही दीदी-दीदी कहलाती हैं और कुमार कितने भी पुराने हैं तो दादा-दादा कोई नहीं कहता .

dēkhō kumār kahtē haĩ ki kumārī agar teacher bantī haĩ , centre par jātī haĩ tō kumārī jātē hī dīdī-dīdī kahlātī haĩ aur kumār kitnē bhī purānē haĩ tō dādā-dādā kōī nahī̃ kahtā .

dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] kumār[x] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ki[conj.] kumārī[x] agar teacher bannā[pres.pl.f.12hon3] , centre par[postp.]|par[adj.] jānā[pres.pl.f.12hon3] tō kumārī[x] jānā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] hī[p.] dīdī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] kahlānā[pres.pl.f.12hon3] aur kumār[x] kitnā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhī[p.] purānā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] tō dādā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] kōī[pn.;d.] nahī̃[neg] kahnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] .

see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] kumar say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that kumari if teacher become[pres.pl.f.12hon3] , centre (at|other) go[pres.pl.f.12hon3] then kumari go[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] only didi call[pres.pl.f.12hon3] and kumar so too old be[pres.pl.12hon3] then Dada some not say[pres-part.m.sg.d.] .

²²⁸Kumars complain that when a kumari becomes a teacher or as soon as she goes to a centre, she is called a Didi. ²²⁹But, no matter how old a kumar is, no one says, “Dada, Dada”.

¹⁸⁵

कुमारियों के लिए तो ट्रेनिंग होती है निकालें , और कुमार सेन्टर सम्भालने के लिए आफर करते हैं तो दादियाँ सोचती हैं .

kumāriyō̃ kē liē tō training hōtī hai nikālē̃ , aur kumār centre sambhālnē kē liē offer kartē haĩ tō dādiyā̃ sōchtī haĩ .

kumārī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kē liē[x] tō training hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] nikālnā[opt.pl.12hon3] , aur kumār[x] centre sambhālnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kē liē[x] offer karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] tō dādī[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] sōchnā[pres.pl.f.12hon3] .

kumari for then training be[pres.sg.f.23] x[opt.pl.12hon3] , and kumar centre be careful[inf.m.pl.,o.] for offer do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] then Dadi think[pres.pl.f.12hon3] .

²³⁰For kumaris, there is the training for them to emerge and run a centre. ²³¹However, when a kumar offers himself to run a centre, the Dadis have to think about it!

¹⁸⁶

तो कुमारियों का भाग्य बहुत सहज बना हुआ है .

tō kumāriyō̃ kā bhāgya bahut sahaj banā huā hai .

tō kumārī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] bahut sahaj[adj.] banānā[root]|bannā[past-part.m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] .

then kumari of x very easy (create[root]|become[past-part.m.sg.d.]) be[pres-perf.sg.m.23] .

²³²So, the fortune of the kumris is created very easily.

¹⁸⁷

कुमारी ने ट्रेनिंग की , योग्य बनी तो दहेज में सेन्टर मिल जाता है .

kumārī nē training kī|key , yōgya banī tō dahēj mē̃ centre mil jātā hai .

kumārī[x] nē[postp.] training kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key , yōgya[adj.] bannā[past-part.f.] tō dahēj[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] centre milnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

kumari ∅ training (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) , worthy become[past-part.f.] then dowry in centre receive[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

²³³The kumaris are simply trained and made worthy and then receive a centre as their dowry.

¹⁸⁸

तो कुमारी जीवन कितनी श्रेष्ठ है , कितने गोल्डन चांस हैं , वह सोचो .

tō kumārī jīvan kitnī śhrēṣhṭh hai , kitnē golden chance haĩ , vah sōchō .

tō kumārī[x] jīvan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kitnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] śhrēṣhṭha[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , kitnā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] golden chance hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , vah[pn.sg.d.] sōchnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

then kumari life so elevated be[pres.sg.23] , so golden chance be[pres.pl.12hon3] , that think[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

²³⁴So, see how elevated the kumari life is! ²³⁵Just think about the golden chance that you have.

¹⁸⁹

अगर अभी से सेवाधारी नहीं बनेंगे तो भविष्य में भी क्या बनेंगे  ?

agar abhī sē sēvādhārī nahī̃ banē̃gē tō bhaviṣhya mē̃ bhī kyā banē̃gē  ?

agar ab[adv.hī] sē[postp.] sēvādhārī[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] bannā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] tō bhaviṣhya[adj.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] kyā bannā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

if now from server not become[fut.m.pl.12hon3] then future in too what become[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

²³⁶If you do not become a server now, what can you become in the future?

¹⁹⁰

सेवाधारी किसे मिलेंगे  ?

sēvādhārī kisē milē̃gē  ?

sēvādhārī[n.m.;sg.,d.] kaun[pn.sg.kō] milnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

server who[.kō] receive[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

²³⁷Who will have others to serve them?

¹⁹¹

जो सेवा करेंगे उन्हें मिलेंगे .

jō sēvā karē̃gē unhē̃ milē̃gē .

jō[pn.;d.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] vah[pn.pl.kō] milnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

that service do[fut.m.pl.12hon3] that[.kō] receive[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

²³⁸Only those who do service now.

¹⁹²

इसलिए कुमारियों को अपना फैसला जल्दी से जल्दी करना चाहिए .

isliē kumāriyō̃ kō apnā phaislā jaldī sē jaldī karnā chāhiē .

isliē kumārī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] apnā[pn.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.]|apnānā[root] phaĩslā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] jaldī sē[postp.] jaldī karnā[imp.pl.2hon.inf+cāhnā]|karnā[.oblig3] .

therefore kumari to (one’s own|adopt[root]) x very quickly from very quickly (do[imp.pl.2hon.inf+cāhnā]|do[.oblig3]) .

²³⁹Therefore, kumaris have to make their decision very quickly.

¹⁹³

लेकिन बापदादा कुमारियों के लिए एक बात सदा कहते हैं - सच्ची सेवाधारी कुमारी वह है जो शक्ति रूप कुमारी है .

lēkin bāpdādā kumāriyō̃ kē liē ēk bāt sadā kahtē haĩ - sachchī sēvādhārī kumārī vah hai jō śhakti rūp kumārī hai .

lēkin bāpdādā kumārī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kē liē[x] ēk[adj.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] sadā kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] - sachchā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] sēvādhārī[n.m.;sg.,d.] kumārī[x] vah[pn.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] jō[pn.;d.] śhakti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] rūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kumārī[x] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

but BapDada kumari for one matter constantly say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] - true server kumari that be[pres.sg.23] that Shakti Rup kumari be[pres.sg.23] .

²⁴⁰However, BapDada constantly tells the kumaris that a kumari is only a true server when she is a kumari with the form of Shakti.

¹⁹⁴

अगर निमित्त सेवाधारी शक्तिशाली नहीं है तो औरों को शक्तिशाली नहीं बना सकती .

agar nimitt sēvādhārī śhaktiśhālī nahī̃ hai tō aurō̃ kō śhaktiśhālī nahī̃ banā saktī .

agar nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] sēvādhārī[n.m.;sg.,d.] śhaktiśhālī[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] tō aurō̃ kō[postp.] śhaktiśhālī[adj.] nahī̃[neg] banānā[root]|bannā[past-part.m.sg.d.] saknā[pres-part.f.] .

if instrument server powerful not be[pres.sg.23] then others to powerful not (create[root]|become[past-part.m.sg.d.]) can[pres-part.f.] .

²⁴¹If the instrument server is not powerful, she cannot make others powerful.

¹⁹⁵

अगर कुमारी शक्तिशाली नहीं है , कोमल है , एक होती है कोमल और दूसरी होती है किसी के प्रभाव में आने वाली .

agar kumārī śhaktiśhālī nahī̃ hai , kōmal hai , ēk hōtī hai kōmal aur dūsrī hōtī hai kisī kē|K prabhāv mē̃ ānē vālī .

agar kumārī[x] śhaktiśhālī[adj.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , kōmal[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , ēk[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] kōmal[adj.] aur dūsrā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] kōī[pn.sg.o.]|kuchh[pn.sg.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K prabhāv[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] ānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.]|ānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] .

if kumari powerful not be[pres.sg.23] , x be[pres.sg.23] , one be[pres.sg.f.23] x and other be[pres.sg.f.23] (some|anything) (of|K) x in (x|come[inf.m.pl.,o.]) those who .

²⁴²If a kumari is not powerful, but delicate... ²⁴³It is one thing to be delicate and another to become influenced by someone.

¹⁹⁶

ज्ञान का प्रभाव डालने वाली नहीं लेकिन कोई के प्रभाव में प्रभावित होने वाली .

gyān kā prabhāv ḍālnē vālī nahī̃ lēkin kōī kē|K prabhāv mē̃ prabhāvit hōnē vālī .

gyān[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] prabhāv[n.m.;sg.,d.] ḍālnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] nahī̃[neg] lēkin kōī[pn.;d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K prabhāv[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] prabhāvit[adj.] hōnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] .

knowledge of x create[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who not but some (of|K) x in x be[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who .

²⁴⁴She would not be one who impresses others with knowledge, but one who becomes impressed with the influence of others.

¹⁹⁷

कुमारियों में दादियों को सदा इसी एक बात का डर लगता है .

kumāriyō̃ mē̃ dādiyō̃ kō sadā isī ēk bāt kā ḍar lagtā hai .

kumārī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] mē̃[postp.] dādī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] sadā yah[pn.sg.hī] ēk[adj.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] ḍar[n.m.;sg.,d.]|ḍarnā[root] lagnā[pres.sg.m.23] .

kumari in Dadi to constantly this[.hī] one matter of (x|have fear[root]) x[pres.sg.m.23] .

²⁴⁵The Dadis are also always afraid for the kumaris in this aspect.

¹⁹⁸

निमित्त बनी बाप के ऊपर प्रभावित करने के लिए लेकिन स्वयं प्रभावित हो जाए तो क्या रिजल्ट निकलेगी  ?

nimitt banī bāp kē ūpar prabhāvit karnē kē liē lēkin svayã prabhāvit hō jāē tō kyā result nikalēgī  ?

nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[past-part.f.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kē ūpar[x] prabhāvit[adj.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kē liē[x] lēkin svayã prabhāvit[adj.] hōnā[opt.sg.23.root+jānā] tō kyā result nikalnā[fut.f.sg.23]  ?

instrument become[past-part.f.] father over x do[inf.m.pl.,o.] for but x x be[opt.sg.23.root+jānā] then what result be extracted[fut.f.sg.23]  ?

²⁴⁶You become an instrument to impress with the Father, but instead of that, if you become impressed by others, what will be the result?

¹⁹⁹

तो बापदादा कहते हैं कुमारियां हाँ तो करती हैं , हाँ जायेंगे , निकलेंगे लेकिन अभी समय के हिसाब से ऐसी कुमारियां चाहिए जो जिस सेन्टर पर जाएं उस सेवाकेन्द्र को निर्विघ्न बनाकर रखें .

tō bāpdādā kahtē haĩ kumāriyā̃ hā̃ tō kartī haĩ , hā̃ jāyēṅgē , nikalē̃gē lēkin abhī samay kē|K hisāb sē aisī kumāriyā̃ chāhiē jō jis centre par jāē̃ us sēvākēndra kō nirvighna banākar rakhē̃ .

tō bāpdādā kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] kumārī[x] hā̃ tō karnā[pres.pl.f.12hon3] , hā̃ jānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , nikalnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] lēkin ab[adv.hī] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K hisāb[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] aisā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] kumārī[x] chāhiē|chāhnā[imp.pl.2hon] jō[pn.;d.] jō[pn.sg.o.] centre par[postp.]|par[adj.] jānā[opt.pl.12hon3] vah[pn.sg.o.] sēvākēndra[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] nirvighna[adj.] banānā[abs.] rakhnā[opt.pl.12hon3] .

then BapDada say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] kumari yes then do[pres.pl.f.12hon3] , yes go[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , be extracted[fut.m.pl.12hon3] but now time (of|K) account from such kumari (should|x[imp.pl.2hon]) that that centre (at|other) go[opt.pl.12hon3] that centre to free from obstacles create[abs.] keep[opt.pl.12hon3] .

²⁴⁷So BapDada says: Kumaris say “Yes, we will go”. ²⁴⁸However, according to the present time, kumaris who can keep their centre free from obstacles, wherever it is, are needed.

²⁰⁰

निर्विघ्न का सर्टिफिकेट स्वयं को भी देवें और साथियों से भी लेवें .

nirvighna kā certificate svayã kō bhī dēvē̃ aur sāthiyō̃ sē bhī lēvē̃ .

nirvighna[adj.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] certificate svayã kō[postp.] bhī[p.] dēnā[opt.pl.12hon3] aur sāthī[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] bhī[p.] lēnā[opt.pl.12hon3] .

free from obstacles of certificate x to too give[opt.pl.12hon3] and companion from too take[opt.pl.12hon3] .

²⁴⁹You should be able to give the obstaclefree certificate to yourself and also claim it from your companions.

²⁰¹

तो ऐसी कुमारियां हो या थोड़ी सी वस्तु पर , कोई व्यक्ति पर प्रभावित होने वाली हो  ?

tō aisī kumāriyā̃ hō yā thōṛī see|sī|C vastu par , kōī vyakti par prabhāvit hōnē vālī hō  ?

²⁵⁰So, are you such kumaris? ²⁵¹You are not kumaris who are going to be influenced by other people or possessions, are you?

²⁰²

क्या हो  ?

kyā hō  ?

kyā hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2]  ?

what (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2])  ?

²⁵²What are you?

²⁰³

क्या सोचती हो  ?

kyā sōchtī hō  ?

kyā sōchnā[pres.pl.f.2]  ?

what think[pres.pl.f.2]  ?

²⁵³What are you thinking?

²⁰⁴

बापदादा को ऐसी कुमारियां चाहिए जो निर्विघ्न कुमारी , विघ्न-विनाशक कुमारी , कमजोर को शक्तिशाली बनाने वाली कुमारी हो , ऐसे नहीं बापदादा वा दादियां हैण्डस करके भेजें और हैण्डस के बजाए मैं और हेडक ( सरदर्द ) बन जाएं .

bāpdādā kō aisī kumāriyā̃ chāhiē jō nirvighna kumārī , vighna-vināśhak kumārī , kamjōr kō śhaktiśhālī banānē vālī kumārī hō , aisē nahī̃ bāpdādā vā dādiyā̃ hands karkē bhējē̃ aur hands kē bajāē maĩ aur hēḍak ( saradarda ) ban jāē̃ .

bāpdādā kō[postp.] aisā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] kumārī[x] chāhiē|chāhnā[imp.pl.2hon] jō[pn.;d.] nirvighna[adj.] kumārī[x] , vighna vināśhak[n.m.;sg.,d.] kumārī[x] , kamjōr[adj.] kō[postp.] śhaktiśhālī[adj.] banānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] kumārī[x] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , aisē nahī̃[x] bāpdādā vā dādī[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] hand karnā[abs.] bhējnā[opt.pl.12hon3] aur hand kē bajāē[x] maĩ[pn.sg.d.] aur x ( x ) bannā[opt.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] .

BapDada to such kumari (should|x[imp.pl.2hon]) that free from obstacles kumari , destroyer of obstacles kumari , weak to powerful create[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who kumari (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , it isn't that BapDada or Dadi hand do[abs.] x[opt.pl.12hon3] and hand instead of I and x ( x ) become[opt.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] .

²⁵⁴BapDada needs kumaris who are free from obstacles, destroyers of obstacles, those who make weak ones powerful. ²⁵⁵It should not be that BapDada and the Dadis send you as hands, but, instead of being hands, you become a headache!

²⁰⁵

तो ऐसी कुमारियां नहीं चाहिए .

tō aisī kumāriyā̃ nahī̃ chāhiē .

tō aisā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] kumārī[x] nahī̃[neg] chāhiē|chāhnā[imp.pl.2hon] .

then such kumari not (should|x[imp.pl.2hon]) .

²⁵⁶Baba doesn’t need such kumaris!

²⁰⁶

तो क्या समझती हो  ?

tō kyā samajhtī hō  ?

tō kyā samajhnā[pres.pl.f.2]  ?

then what understand[pres.pl.f.2]  ?

²⁵⁷What do you think?

²⁰⁷

ऐसी कुमारियां तैयार हैं , हिम्मत है कि हम विघ्न-विनाशक बनकर रहेंगे  ?

aisī kumāriyā̃ taiyār haĩ , himmat hai ki ham vighna-vināśhak bankar rahē̃gē  ?

aisā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] kumārī[x] taiyār[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , himmat[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ki[conj.] ham[pn.pl.] vighna vināśhak[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[abs.] rahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

such kumari x be[pres.pl.12hon3] , courage be[pres.sg.23] that we destroyer of obstacles become[abs.] remain[fut.m.pl.12hon3]  ?

²⁵⁸Are such kumaris ready? ²⁵⁹Do you have the courage to be a destroyer of obstacles?

²⁰⁸

जो ऐसा बनेंगी वह हाथ उठाओ .

jō aisā banē̃gī vah hāth uṭhāō .

jō[pn.;d.] aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bannā[fut.f.pl.12hon3] vah[pn.sg.d.] hāth uṭhānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

that such become[fut.f.pl.12hon3] that raise your hands .

²⁰⁹

दिल से उठा रही हो  ?

dil sē uṭhā rahī hō  ?

dil[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] uṭhānā[pres.pl.f.acc.2]  ?

heart from uplift[pres.pl.f.acc.2]  ?

²⁶⁰Such kumaris who will become this, raise your hands!

²¹⁰

संगठन में शर्म के मारे तो नहीं उठा रही हो  ?

saṅgaṭhan mē̃ śharm kē|K mārē tō nahī̃ uṭhā rahī hō  ?

saṅgaṭhan[x] mē̃[postp.] śharm[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K mārnā[opt.sg.23]|mārnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] tō nahī̃[neg] uṭhānā[pres.pl.f.acc.2]  ?

gathering in x (of|K) (beat[opt.sg.23]|beat[past-part.m.pl.,o.]) then not uplift[pres.pl.f.acc.2]  ?

²⁶¹Are you raising your hand sincerely?

²¹¹

जो सेन्टर्स पर जाने के लिए तैयार हैं और ऐसा विघ्न-विनाशक बनेंगी , वही उठो बाकी बैठ जाओ .

jō centres par jānē kē liē taiyār haĩ aur aisā vighna-vināśhak banē̃gī , vahī uṭhō bākī baiṭh jāō .

jō[pn.;d.] centre par[postp.]|par[adj.] jānnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|jānā[inf.m.pl.,o.]|jānnā[opt.sg.23] kē liē[x] taiyār[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] aur aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] vighna vināśhak[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[fut.f.pl.12hon3] , vahī uṭhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] bākī|bākī baiṭhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+jānā] .

that centre (at|other) (know[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|go[inf.m.pl.,o.]|know[opt.sg.23]) for x be[pres.pl.12hon3] and such destroyer of obstacles become[fut.f.pl.12hon3] , this wake up[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] (others|but) sit[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+jānā] .

²⁶²You are not just raising your hand because of being part of the gathering and so would feel ashamed if you didn’t raise your hand, are you?

²¹²

जो 18 वर्ष की आयु से ऊपर हैं और विघ्न-विनाशक होके सेन्टर पर जाने के लिए तैयार हैं , वह खड़े हो जाओ .

jō 18 varṣh kī|key āyu sē ūpar haĩ aur vighna-vināśhak hōkē centre par jānē kē liē taiyār haĩ , vah khaṛē hō jāō .

jō[pn.;d.] 18 varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key āyu[n.f.;sg.] sē[postp.] ūpar hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] aur vighna vināśhak[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[abs.] centre par[postp.]|par[adj.] jānnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|jānā[inf.m.pl.,o.]|jānnā[opt.sg.23] kē liē[x] taiyār[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , vah[pn.sg.d.] khaṛā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+jānā] .

that 18 year (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) x from over be[pres.pl.12hon3] and destroyer of obstacles be[abs.] centre (at|other) (know[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|go[inf.m.pl.,o.]|know[opt.sg.23]) for x be[pres.pl.12hon3] , that standing be[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+jānā] .

²⁶³Those who are ready to go anywhere and who are going to become a destroyer of obstacles, stand up! ²⁶⁴Everyone else can sit down.

²¹³

यह सब विघ्न-विनाशक निमित्त सेवाधारी हैं  ?

yah sab vighna-vināśhak nimitt sēvādhārī haĩ  ?

yah[pn.sg.d.] sab[adj.] vighna vināśhak[n.m.;sg.,d.] nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] sēvādhārī[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3]  ?

this all destroyer of obstacles instrument server be[pres.pl.12hon3]  ?

²¹⁴

( हाँ जी ) फोटो निकालो .

( hā̃ jī ) phōṭō nikālō .

( hā̃ jī[x] ) photo nikālnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

( yes ) photograph x[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

²⁶⁵Those who are ready for a centre and are destroyers of obstacles, stand up!

²¹⁵

अभी दादियों को यह कैसेट देना , फिर आप नोट करना - कौन-कौन हैं  ?

abhī dādiyō̃ kō yah cassette dēnā , phir āp note karnā - kaun-kaun haĩ  ?

ab[adv.hī] dādī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] yah[pn.sg.d.] cassette dēnā[inf.m.sg.d.] , phir[adv.]|phirnā[root] āp[pn.pl.] note karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] - kaun[pn.;d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3]  ?

now Dadi to this x give[inf.m.sg.d.] , (then|turn[root]) you note do[inf.m.sg.d.] - who be[pres.pl.12hon3]  ?

²⁶⁶Only stand up if you are over 18 years old. ²⁶⁷Are all of you the servers who are destroyers of obstacles?

²¹⁶

मुबारक हो , मुबारक हो .

mubārak hō , mubārak hō .

mubārak[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , mubārak[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] .

congratulations (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , congratulations (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

²⁶⁸(Ha ji.) ²⁶⁹Take a photograph!

²¹⁷

कुमारियों को बापदादा भी मुबारक देते हैं लेकिन राइट हैण्ड बनना , लेफ्ट हैण्ड नहीं बनना .

kumāriyō̃ kō bāpdādā bhī mubārak dētē haĩ lēkin right hand bannā , left hand nahī̃ bannā .

kumārī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] bāpdādā bhī[p.] mubārak[n.f.;sg.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] lēkin right hand[x] bannā[inf.m.sg.d.] , left hand[x] nahī̃[neg] bannā[inf.m.sg.d.] .

kumari to BapDada too congratulations give[pres.pl.m.12hon3] but right hand become[inf.m.sg.d.] , left hand not become[inf.m.sg.d.] .

²⁷⁰Now, give this video cassette to the Dadis and then you can note down the names of these kumaris. ²⁷¹Congratulations!

²¹⁸

अच्छा .

achchhā .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] .

achcha .

²⁷²Congratulations!

²¹⁹

तीसरा ग्रुप है - गीता पाठशाला वालों का - वह हाथ उठाओ .

tīsrā group hai - gītā pāṭhśhālā vālō̃ kā - vah hāth uṭhāō .

tīsrā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] group hōnā[pres.sg.23] - gītā pāṭhśhālā[x] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] - vah[pn.sg.d.] hāth uṭhānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

third group be[pres.sg.23] - x those who of - that raise your hands .

²⁷³Achcha. ²⁷⁴(Those who are ready will be given one month’s training.)

²²⁰

खड़े होकर हाथ हिलाओ .

khaṛē hōkar hāth hilāō .

khaṛā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[abs.] hāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] hilānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

standing be[abs.] hand make fluctuate[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

²²¹

( करीब 4000 भाई-बहिन हैं ) बहुत हैं .

( karīb 4000 bhāī-bahin haĩ ) bahut haĩ .

( karīb 4000 bhāī-bahin[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] ) bahut hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

( nearly 4000 brother and sister be[pres.pl.12hon3] ) very be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

²⁷⁵Although BapDada congratulates you kumaris, you have to become a right hand, not a left one.

²²²

अच्छा - गीता पाठ - शाला के निमित्त बच्चों को भी बापदादा निमित्त सेवाधारी कहते हैं .

achchhā - gītā pāṭh - śālā kē nimitt bachchō̃ kō bhī bāpdādā nimitt sēvādhārī kahtē haĩ .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] - gītā[n.f.;sg.] pāṭh[n.m.;sg.,d.] - x kē nimitt[x] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] bhī[p.] bāpdādā nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] sēvādhārī[n.m.;sg.,d.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

achcha - Gita lesson - x x child to too BapDada instrument server say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

²⁷⁶Achcha. ²⁷⁷The third group is of those who run Gita Pathshalas.All of you raise your hands! ²⁷⁸Stand up and raise your hands!

²²³

अपनी प्रवृत्ति भी सम्भाल रहे हैं और अलौकिक सेवा के निमित्त भी बने हैं तो डबल काम कर रहे हैं .

apnī pravr̥itti bhī sambhāl rahē haĩ aur alaukik sēvā kē nimitt bhī banē haĩ tō double kām kar rahē haĩ .

apnā[pn.ā=>ī;f.] pravr̥itti[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] sambhālnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] aur alaukik[adj.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kē nimitt[x] bhī[p.] bannā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] tō double kām[n.m.;sg.,d.]|kām[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

one’s own famille too be careful[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] and alokik service x too become[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] then double (lust|task) do[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

²⁷⁹(There are nearly four thousand brothers and sisters.) ²⁸⁰There are many of you. ²⁸¹BapDada calls the children who are instruments at the Gita Pathshalas, the instrument servers.

²²⁴

लेकिन गीता पाठशाला के निमित्त आत्माओं की विशेषता है सदा अपने को हर कार्य में ट्रस्टी समझकर चलना .

lēkin gītā pāṭhśhālā kē nimitt ātmāō̃ kī|key viśhēṣhtā hai sadā apnē kō har|her kārya mē̃ trustee samajhkar chalnā .

lēkin gītā pāṭhśhālā[x] kē nimitt[x] ātmā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key viśhēṣhtā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] sadā apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kō[postp.] harnā[root]|har|her kārya[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] trustee samajhnā[abs.] chalnā[inf.m.sg.d.] .

but x x soul (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) speciality be[pres.sg.23] constantly one’s own to (x[root]|x) task in trustee understand[abs.] continue[inf.m.sg.d.] .

²⁸²You look after your families and have also become instruments for alokik service. ²⁸³Therefore, you are doing double the work.

²²⁵

क्योंकि बापदादा ने देखा कि गीता पाठशाला खोलने वाले भिन्न-भिन्न संकल्प से गीता पाठशाला खोलते हैं , कोई तो सच्चे दिल से सेवा प्रति गीता पाठशाला खोलते हैं वा चलाते हैं लेकिन कोई-कोई जब वृद्धि होती है तो कहाँ-कहाँ भावनाओं में भी मिक्स हो जाता है .

kyōṅki bāpdādā nē dēkhā ki gītā pāṭhśhālā khōlnē vālē bhinn-bhinn saṅkalp sē gītā pāṭhśhālā khōltē haĩ , kōī tō sachchē dil sē sēvā prati gītā pāṭhśhālā khōltē haĩ vā chalātē haĩ lēkin kōī-kōī jab vr̥iddhi hōtī hai tō kahā̃-kahā̃ bhāvnāō̃ mē̃ bhī mix hō jātā hai .

kyōṅki bāpdādā nē[postp.] dēkhnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] ki[conj.] gītā pāṭhśhālā[x] khōlnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhinn[adj.] saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] gītā pāṭhśhālā[x] khōlnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , kōī[pn.;d.] tō sachchā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] dil[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] prati gītā pāṭhśhālā[x] khōlnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] vā chalānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] lēkin kōī[pn.;d.] jab vr̥iddhi[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23] tō kahā̃ bhāvnā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] mix hōnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

because BapDada ∅ see[past-part.m.sg.d.] that x open[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who different thought from x open[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , some then true heart from service for x open[pres.pl.m.12hon3] or x[pres.pl.m.12hon3] but some when growth be[pres.sg.f.23] then where feeling in too x be[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

²⁸⁴However, the speciality of instrument souls in a Gita Pathshala is to move along whilst constantly considering oneself to be a trustee, because BapDada has seen that those who open Gita Pathshalas open them with different thoughts. ²⁸⁵Some open a Gita Pathshala with an honest heart in order to serve.

²²⁶

तो बापदादा देखते हैं कि कोई-कोई गीता पाठशाला अपने परिवार की पालना अर्थ भी खोलते हैं , परिवार की पालना भी हो और निमित्त सेवा भी हो .

tō bāpdādā dēkhtē haĩ ki kōī-kōī gītā pāṭhśhālā apnē parivār kī|key pālnā arth|earth bhī khōltē haĩ , parivār kī|key pālnā bhī hō aur nimitt sēvā bhī hō .

tō bāpdādā dēkhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ki[conj.] kōī[pn.;d.] gītā pāṭhśhālā[x] apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] parivār[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key pālnā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|pālnā[inf.m.sg.d.] arth[n.m.;sg.,d.]|earth bhī[p.] khōlnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , parivār[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key pālnā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|pālnā[inf.m.sg.d.] bhī[p.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] aur nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] .

²⁸⁶However, when the number increases, their feelings sometimes become mixed. ²⁸⁷BapDada has seen that some, not everyone, but some also open a Gita Pathshalas to sustain their own family.

²²⁷

तो गीता पाठशाला का अर्थ है ट्रस्टी बनके सेवा करना क्योंकि जो भी आत्मायें आती हैं वह बाप के स्नेह में आती हैं , इसलिए ट्रस्टी बनकर कारोबार चलाना बहुत आवश्यक है .

tō gītā pāṭhśhālā kā arth|earth hai trustee bankē sēvā karnā kyōṅki jō bhī ātmāyē̃ ātī haĩ vah bāp kē|K snēh mē̃ ātī haĩ , isliē trustee bankar kārōbār chalānā bahut āvaśhyak hai .

tō gītā pāṭhśhālā[x] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] arth[n.m.;sg.,d.]|earth hōnā[pres.sg.23] trustee bannā[abs.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] kyōṅki jō[pn.;d.] bhī[p.] ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] ānā[pres.pl.f.12hon3] vah[pn.sg.d.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] ānā[pres.pl.f.12hon3] , isliē trustee bannā[abs.] kārōbār[n.m.;sg.,d.] chalānā[inf.m.sg.d.] bahut āvaśhyak[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

then x of (meaning|earth) be[pres.sg.23] trustee become[abs.] service do[inf.m.sg.d.] because that too soul come[pres.pl.f.12hon3] that father (of|K) love in come[pres.pl.f.12hon3] , therefore trustee become[abs.] x x[inf.m.sg.d.] very x be[pres.sg.23] .

²⁸⁸There should be the sustenance of the family and there should also be service, and so to open a Gita Pathshala means to serve as a trustee. ²⁸⁹All the souls that come to you come out of love for the Father.

²²⁸

एकदम निःस्वार्थ सेवा की भावना वालों को कहेंगे सच्ची गीता पाठशाला .

ēkdam niḥsvārth sēvā kī|key bhāvnā vālō̃ kō kahē̃gē sachchī gītā pāṭhśhālā .

ēkdam niḥsvārth[adj.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key bhāvnā[n.f.;sg.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] kahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] sachchā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] gītā pāṭhśhālā[x] .

x altruistic service (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) feeling those who to say[fut.m.pl.12hon3] true x .

²⁹⁰This is why it is absolutely essential for you to run a Gita Pathshala as a trustee.

²²⁹

बाकी बापदादा मैजॉरिटी शुभ भावना से सेवा निमित्त चलाने वाली आत्माओं पर बहुत खुश हैं कि अपना समय सफल कर रहे हैं .

bākī bāpdādā majority śhubh bhāvnā sē sēvā nimitt chalānē vālī ātmāō̃ par bahut khuśh haĩ ki apnā samay saphal kar rahē haĩ .

bākī|bākī bāpdādā majority śhubh bhāvnā[x] sē[postp.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] chalānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] ātmā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] bahut khuśh[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] ki[conj.] apnā[pn.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.]|apnānā[root] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] saphal[adj.] karnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

(others|but) BapDada majority pure feeling from service instrument x[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who soul (at|other) very happy be[pres.pl.12hon3] that (one’s own|adopt[root]) time successful do[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

²³⁰

डबल कार्य उसी शुद्ध भावना से सम्भाल रहे हैं .

double kārya usī śhuddha bhāvnā sē sambhāl rahē haĩ .

double kārya[n.m.;sg.,d.] vah[pn.sg.hī] śhuddh[x] bhāvnā[n.f.;sg.] sē[postp.] sambhālnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

double task that[.hī] pure feeling from be careful[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

²⁹¹Those who have completely altruistic feelings of service are said to be those who run a true Gita Pathshala. ²⁹²BapDada is very happy with the majority of children who run the Gita Pathshalas with good wishes.

²³¹

और कोई भावना मिक्स नहीं है , न नाम की , न लौकिक परिवार के पालना की .

aur kōī bhāvnā mix nahī̃ hai , na nām kī|key , na laukik parivār kē|K pālnā kī|key .

²⁹³He feels that they are using their time in a worthwhile way. ²⁹⁴You have a double duty to do.

²³²

तो ऐसी शुद्ध भावना , सेवा की भावना वाली ट्रस्टी आत्माओं को बापदादा बहुत-बहुत-बहुत मुबारक देते हैं .

tō aisī śhuddha bhāvnā , sēvā kī|key bhāvnā vālī trustee ātmāō̃ kō bāpdādā bahut-bahut-bahut mubārak dētē haĩ .

tō aisā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] śhuddh[x] bhāvnā[n.f.;sg.] , sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key bhāvnā[n.f.;sg.] vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] trustee ātmā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] bāpdādā bahut mubārak[n.f.;sg.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

then such pure feeling , service (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) feeling those who trustee soul to BapDada very congratulations give[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

²⁹⁵No other feelings should be mixed with these pure feelings. ²⁹⁶Neither of their name, nor of being instruments to give sustenance.

²³³

अच्छे हैं और अच्छे ही रहेंगे .

achchhē haĩ aur achchhē hī rahē̃gē .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] aur achchhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hī[p.] rahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

achcha be[pres.pl.12hon3] and achcha only remain[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

²³⁴

लेकिन चेक करना कोई भी और भावना मिक्स नहीं हो .

lēkin check karnā kōī bhī aur bhāvnā mix nahī̃ hō .

lēkin check karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] kōī bhī[x] aur bhāvnā[n.f.;sg.] mix nahī̃[neg] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] .

but check do[inf.m.sg.d.] anyone and feeling x not (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

²⁹⁷BapDada gives many, many, many congratulations to the souls who are trustees with the pure feelings and motives to serve.

²³⁵

सेवा की भावना के सिवाए और कोई भावना आने नहीं देना .

sēvā kī|key bhāvnā kē|K sivāē aur kōī bhāvnā ānē nahī̃ dēnā .

sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key bhāvnā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sivāē aur kōī[x] bhāvnā[n.f.;sg.] ānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.]|ānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] nahī̃[neg] dēnā[inf.m.sg.d.] .

service (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) feeling (of|K) except someone else feeling (x|come[inf.m.pl.,o.]) not give[inf.m.sg.d.] .

²⁹⁸You are good and you will remain good. ²⁹⁹However, check that no other feelings become mixed.

²³⁶

बाकी सेवा करते हो अर्थात् अनेक आत्माओं का कल्याण करते हो .

bākī sēvā kartē hō arthāt anēk ātmāō̃ kā kalyāṇ kartē hō .

bākī|bākī sēvā[n.f.;sg.] karnā[pres.pl.m.2] arthāt anēk[adj.] ātmā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] kalyāṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[pres.pl.m.2] .

(others|but) service do[pres.pl.m.2] that is many soul of benefit do[pres.pl.m.2] .

³⁰⁰Except for feeling of service, do not allow any other feelings to come.

²³⁷

और देखा गया है , गीता पाठशाला वालों की विशेषता है कि प्रवृत्ति वालों को देख प्रवृत्ति वाले हिम्मत रखते हैं .

aur dēkhā gayā hai , gītā pāṭhśhālā vālō̃ kī|key viśhēṣhtā hai ki pravr̥itti vālō̃ kō dēkh pravr̥itti vālē himmat rakhtē haĩ .

aur dēkhnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23.past-part+jānā]|dēkhnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23.passive] , gītā pāṭhśhālā[x] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key viśhēṣhtā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ki[conj.] pravr̥itti[n.f.;sg.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] dēkhnā[root] pravr̥itti[n.f.;sg.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] himmat[n.m.;sg.,d.] rakhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

and (see[pres-perf.sg.m.23.past-part+jānā]|see[pres-perf.sg.m.23.passive]) , x those who (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) speciality be[pres.sg.23] that famille those who to see[root] famille those who courage keep[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

³⁰¹You are doing service to benefit souls. ³⁰²So, it has been seen that because a family lives in a Gita Pathshala it has the speciality of inspiring other families to do the same.

²³⁸

सेन्टर पर फिर भी सोचते हैं कि पता नहीं हमको भी छोड़ना पड़ेगा लेकिन प्रवृत्ति में रहते सेवा के निमित्त बनने वाले बच्चों को देख और भी प्रवृत्ति वालों को हिम्मत , उमंग-उत्साह आता है .

centre par phir bhī sōchtē haĩ ki patā nahī̃ hamkō bhī chhōṛnā paṛēgā lēkin pravr̥itti mē̃ rahtē sēvā kē nimitt bannē vālē bachchō̃ kō dēkh aur bhī pravr̥itti vālō̃ kō himmat , umaṅg-utsāh ātā hai .

centre par[postp.]|par[adj.] phir bhī[x] sōchnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ki[conj.] patā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] ham[pn.pl.kō] bhī[p.] chhōṛnā[fut.m.sg.23.oblig2] lēkin pravr̥itti[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] rahnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kē nimitt[x] bannā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] dēkhnā[root] aur bhī[p.] pravr̥itti[n.f.;sg.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] himmat[n.m.;sg.,d.] , umaṅg-utsāh[n.m.;sg.,d.] ānā[pres.sg.m.23] .

centre (at|other) nevertheless think[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that knowledge not we[.kō] too renounce[fut.m.sg.23.oblig2] but famille in remain[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] service x become[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who child to see[root] and too famille those who to courage , zeal and enthusiasm come[pres.sg.m.23] .

³⁰³They think that perhaps at a centre they would have to renounce everything. ³⁰⁴However, when they see the instrument children in families doing service, other families also gain the courage, zeal and enthusiasm to do the same.

²³⁹

इसलिए बापदादा गीता पाठशाला वालों को भी बहुत-बहुत सेवा की मुबारक , यादप्यार दे रहे हैं .

isliē bāpdādā gītā pāṭhśhālā vālō̃ kō bhī bahut-bahut sēvā kī|key mubārak , yādpyār dē rahē haĩ .

isliē bāpdādā gītā pāṭhśhālā[x] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] bhī[p.] bahut sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key mubārak[n.f.;sg.] , yād-pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

therefore BapDada x those who to too very service (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) congratulations , love, remembrance give[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

³⁰⁵This is why BapDada gives those of the Gita Pathshalas, lots and lots of congratulations for their service as well as love and remembrance.

²⁴⁰

एक हाथ की ताली बजाओ .

ēk hāth kī|key tālī bajāō .

ēk[adj.] hāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key tālī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] bajānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

one hand (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) clapping play[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

³⁰⁶Applaud with one hand. ³⁰⁷Achcha.

²⁴¹

अच्छा .

achchhā .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] .

achcha .

²⁴²

चौथा ग्रुप - समर्पण वाली टीचर्स का है .

chauthā group - samarpaṇ vālī teachers kā hai .

chauthā[adj.] group - samarpaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] teacher kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

fourth group - surrender those who teacher of be[pres.sg.23] .

³⁰⁸The fourth group are the teachers who had their surrender ceremony.All of you are teachers.

²⁴³

अच्छा किया , हिम्मत रख अपने सेवा के निमित्त बनने को प्रत्यक्ष स्टेज पर लाया .

achchhā kiyā , himmat rakh apnē sēvā kē nimitt bannē kō pratyakṣha stage par lāyā .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] karnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] , himmat[n.m.;sg.,d.] rakhnā[root] apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kē nimitt[x] bannā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kō[postp.] pratyakṣh[adj.] stage par[postp.]|par[adj.] lānā[past-part.m.sg.d.] .

achcha do[past-part.m.sg.d.] , courage keep[root] one’s own service x become[inf.m.pl.,o.] to visible stage (at|other) x[past-part.m.sg.d.] .

³⁰⁹You have done very well by maintaining courage and revealing your part of serving on the practical stage.

²⁴⁴

और बाप के बनने की , हाथ में हाथ देने की सेरीमनी 5-6 साल पहले हो गई थी लेकिन अभी और हाथ में हाथ पक्का किया , जो छूट नहीं सके .

aur bāp kē|K bannē kī|key , hāth mē̃ hāth dēnē kī|key ceremony 5-6 sāl pahlē hō gaī thī lēkin abhī aur hāth mē̃ hāth pakkā kiyā , jō chhūṭ nahī̃ sakē .

aur bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K bannā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key , hāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] hāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key ceremony 5-6 sāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] pahlā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|pahlē[adv.] hōnā[past-perf.f..root+jānā] lēkin ab[adv.hī] aur hāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] hāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] pakkā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] karnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] , jō[pn.;d.] chhūṭnā[root] nahī̃[neg] saknā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|saknā[opt.sg.23] .

³¹⁰You have already had the ceremony of belonging to Baba and putting your hand into His hand five to six years ago. ³¹¹However, now you have made it very firm by putting your hand in His hand so tightly that you cannot become free.

²⁴⁵

इसलिए बापदादा समर्पण वाली टीचर्स को बधाई देते हैं कि सदा हाथ में हाथ , साथ में साथ पक्का करके विजय माला अपने गले में डालेंगी .

isliē bāpdādā samarpaṇ vālī teachers kō badhāī dētē haĩ ki sadā hāth mē̃ hāth , sāth mē̃ sāth pakkā karkē vijay mālā apnē galē mē̃ ḍālē̃gī .

isliē bāpdādā samarpaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] teacher kō[postp.] badhāī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ki[conj.] sadā hāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] hāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] , sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] pakkā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] karnā[abs.] vijay mālā[x] apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] galnā[opt.sg.23]|galnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|galā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] mē̃[postp.] ḍālnā[fut.f.pl.12hon3] .

therefore BapDada surrender those who teacher to greetings give[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that constantly hand in hand , with in with firm do[abs.] x one’s own (x[opt.sg.23]|x[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|throat) in create[fut.f.pl.12hon3] .

³¹²This is why BapDada is congratulating the surrendered teachers. ³¹³By constantly keeping your hand in His hand and remaining in His company, you put a garland of victory around your neck.

²⁴⁶

अब जिस स्थान पर रहती हो उस स्थान को और स्वयं को निर्विघ्न बनाना .

ab jis sthān par rahtī hō us sthān kō aur svayã kō nirvighna banānā .

ab[adv.] jō[pn.sg.o.] sthān[n.m.;sg.,d.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] rahnā[pres.pl.f.2] vah[pn.sg.o.] sthān[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] aur svayã kō[postp.] nirvighna[adj.] banānā[inf.m.sg.d.] .

now that place (at|other) remain[pres.pl.f.2] that place to and x to free from obstacles create[inf.m.sg.d.] .

³¹⁴Now, will you make yourself and the place you live at free from obstacles?

²⁴⁷

कोई विघ्न की रिपोर्ट नहीं आवे .

kōī vighna kī|key report nahī̃ āvē .

kōī[pn.;d.] vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key report nahī̃[neg] ānā[opt.sg.23] .

some obstacle (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) report not come[opt.sg.23] .

³¹⁵There should be no reports of any obstacle.

²⁴⁸

स्व के पुरूषार्थ में भी विघ्न रूप नहीं बनना .

sva kē|K purūṣhārth mē̃ bhī vighna rūp nahī̃ bannā .

sva kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K puruṣhārth mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] rūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] bannā[inf.m.sg.d.] .

x (of|K) effort in too obstacle Rup not become[inf.m.sg.d.] .

³¹⁶There may not be external obstacles in your personal effort, but they do come in your mind.

²⁴⁹

कई बार बाहर से भले विघ्न नहीं भी हो लेकिन मन में तो आता है ना .

kaī bār bāhar sē bhalē vighna nahī̃ bhī hō lēkin man mē̃ tō ātā hai nā .

kaī bār[n.f.;sg.] bāhar sē[postp.] bhalā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] bhī[p.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] lēkin man[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] tō ānā[pres.sg.m.23] nā .

some time outside from benefit obstacle not too (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) but mind in then come[pres.sg.m.23] ∅ .

³¹⁷So, there should be no obstacles of the mind, of the companions or of the students.

²⁵⁰

तो न मन का विघ्न हो , न साथियों का विघ्न हो , न स्टूडेन्टस द्वारा कोई विघ्न हो .

tō na man kā vighna hō , na sāthiyō̃ kā vighna hō , na students dvārā kōī vighna hō .

tō na[neg] man[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , na[neg] sāthī[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , na[neg] student dvārā kōī[pn.;d.] vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] .

then not mind of obstacle (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , not companion of obstacle (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , not student through some obstacle (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

²⁵¹

स्व निर्विघ्न , सेन्टर निर्विघ्न , साथी निर्विघ्न - यह तीन सर्टिफिकेट इस मुक्ति वर्ष में लेना है .

sva nirvighna , centre nirvighna , sāthī nirvighna - yah tīn certificate is mukti varṣh mē̃ lēnā hai .

sva nirvighna[adj.] , centre nirvighna[adj.] , sāthī[n.m.;sg.,d.] nirvighna[adj.] - yah[pn.sg.d.] tīn[adj.] certificate yah[pn.sg.o.] mukti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] lēnā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

x free from obstacles , centre free from obstacles , companion free from obstacles - this x certificate this liberation year in take[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

³¹⁸So, you have to claim these three certificates in the Year of Liberation: For you yourself to be totally free of obstacles, for your centre to be free of obstacles and your companions to be free of obstacles.

²⁵²

मंजूर है  ?

mañjūr hai  ?

mañjūr[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ?

agree be[pres.sg.23]  ?

³¹⁹Do you agree to this?

²⁵³

और विघ्न डालें तो क्या करेंगी  ?

aur vighna ḍālē̃ tō kyā karē̃gī  ?

aur vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] ḍālnā[opt.pl.12hon3] tō kyā karnā[fut.f.pl.12hon3]  ?

and obstacle create[opt.pl.12hon3] then what do[fut.f.pl.12hon3]  ?

³²⁰What would you do if others create obstacles?

²⁵⁴

आप तो निर्विघ्न होंगी और कोई विघ्न डालने वाला हो , तो क्या करेंगी  ?

āp tō nirvighna hōṅgī aur kōī vighna ḍālnē vālā hō , tō kyā karē̃gī  ?

āp[pn.pl.] tō nirvighna[adj.] hōnā[fut.f.pl.12hon3] aur kōī[x] vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] ḍālnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , tō kyā karnā[fut.f.pl.12hon3]  ?

you then free from obstacles be[fut.f.pl.12hon3] someone else obstacle create[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , then what do[fut.f.pl.12hon3]  ?

³²¹You may be free from obstacles, but what would you do when others create obstacles?

²⁵⁵

विघ्न विनाशक बनेंगी  ?

vighna vināśhak banē̃gī  ?

vighna vināśhak[x] bannā[fut.f.pl.12hon3]  ?

destroyer of obstacles become[fut.f.pl.12hon3]  ?

³²²Become a destroyer of obstacles.

²⁵⁶

तो समर्पण समारोह माना सम्पूर्णता का समारोह .

tō samarpaṇ samārōh mānā sampūrṇtā kā samārōh .

tō samarpaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] samārōh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mānnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]|mānā sampūrṇtā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] samārōh[n.m.;sg.,d.] .

then surrender ceremony (x[past-part.m.sg.d.]|means) perfection of ceremony .

³²³So, to have a surrender ceremony means to have the ceremony for perfection.

²⁵⁷

सिर्फ समर्पणता का समारोह याद नहीं करना , वह भी याद करना लेकिन समय प्रमाण अभी सम्पूर्णता का दिवस मनाना ही है , इतना दृढ़ निश्चय का कंगन बांधकर जाना .

sirph samarpaṇtā kā samārōh yād nahī̃ karnā , vah bhī yād karnā lēkin samay pramāṇ abhī sampūrṇtā kā divas manānā hī hai , itnā dr̥iṛh niśhchay kā kaṅgan bāndhkar jānā .

sirph[adj.] samarpaṇtā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] samārōh[n.m.;sg.,d.] yād[n.f.;sg.] nahī̃[neg] karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] , vah[pn.sg.d.] bhī[p.] yād karnā[x] lēkin samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] pramāṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.]|pramāṇ ab[adv.hī] sampūrṇtā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] divas[n.m.;sg.,d.] manānā[inf.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , itnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] dr̥iṛh[adj.] niśhchay[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] kaṅgan[n.m.;sg.,d.] bāndhnā[abs.] jānnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]|jānā[inf.m.sg.d.] .

only x of ceremony remembrance not do[inf.m.sg.d.] , that too remember but time (under) now perfection of day celebrate[inf.m.sg.d.] only be[pres.sg.23] , such determined faith of bracelet tie[abs.] (know[past-part.m.sg.d.]|go[inf.m.sg.d.]) .

³²⁴Do not just remember the ceremony of surrendering, but also remember that, according to the time, you now have to celebrate the day of perfection. ³²⁵Go from here having tied the bracelet of such firm faith. ³²⁶BapDada is telling all the teachers.

²⁵⁸

बापदादा सभी टीचर्स को कह रहे हैं , जो भी सभी टीचर्स हैं चाहे देश की , चाहे विदेश की वह हाथ उठाओ .

bāpdādā sabhī teachers kō kah rahē haĩ , jō bhī sabhī teachers haĩ chāhē dēśh kī|key , chāhē vidēśh kī|key vah hāth uṭhāō .

bāpdādā sab[adv.hī] teacher kō[postp.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] , jō[pn.;d.] bhī[p.] sab[adv.hī] teacher hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] dēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key , chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key vah[pn.sg.d.] hāth uṭhānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

²⁵⁹

अच्छा .

achchhā .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] .

achcha .

³²⁷All the teachers, raise your hands! ³²⁸Achcha, both the teachers from this land and abroad are here. ³²⁹There are many foreigners here today.

²⁶⁰

आज विदेश भी बहुत है , वेलकम हो आने की विदेश के सेन्टर्स को .

āj vidēśh bhī bahut hai , welcome hō ānē kī|key vidēśh kē|K centres kō .

³³⁰Welcome to those who have arrived from centres abroad! ³³¹BapDada has one pure desire for the teachers.

²⁶¹

अच्छा

achchhā

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.]

achcha

³³²Should He tell you this?

²⁶²

बापदादा की टीचर्स के प्रति एक शुभ भावना है , सुनायें  ?

bāpdādā kī|key teachers kē prati ēk śhubh bhāvnā hai , sunāyē̃  ?

bāpdādā kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key teacher kē prati[x] ēk[adj.] śhubh bhāvnā[x] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , sunānā[opt.pl.12hon3]  ?

BapDada (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) teacher for one pure feeling be[pres.sg.23] , speak[opt.pl.12hon3]  ?

³³³Will you just listen to it, or will you also put it into practice?

²⁶³

सिर्फ सुनेंगी या करेंगी भी  ?

sirph sunē̃gī yā karē̃gī bhī  ?

sirph[adj.] sunnā[fut.f.pl.12hon3] yā karnā[fut.f.pl.12hon3] bhī[p.]  ?

only listen[fut.f.pl.12hon3] or do[fut.f.pl.12hon3] too  ?

²⁶⁴

सिर्फ सोचेंगी या स्वरूप बनेंगी  ?

sirph sōchē̃gī yā svarūp banē̃gī  ?

sirph[adj.] sōchnā[fut.f.pl.12hon3] yā svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[fut.f.pl.12hon3]  ?

only think[fut.f.pl.12hon3] or form become[fut.f.pl.12hon3]  ?

³³⁴Will you just think about it or will you also become an embodiment of it. ³³⁵Will you hear it?

²⁶⁵

सुनेंगी , करेंगी … अच्छा-बहुत छोटी सी शुभ भावना है .

sunē̃gī , karē̃gī … acchā-bahut chhōṭī see|sī|C śhubh bhāvnā hai .

sunnā[fut.f.pl.12hon3] , karnā[fut.f.pl.12hon3] … x chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] see|sā[adj.ā=>ī;f.]|C śhubh bhāvnā[x] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

listen[fut.f.pl.12hon3] , do[fut.f.pl.12hon3] … x small (see|x) pure feeling be[pres.sg.23] .

³³⁶Will you do it? ³³⁷It is a very small pure desire. ³³⁸It is not a big thing.

²⁶⁶

बड़ी बात भी नहीं है , बहुत छोटी है .

baṛī bāt bhī nahī̃ hai , bahut chhōṭī hai .

baṛā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , bahut chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

very matter too not be[pres.sg.23] , very small be[pres.sg.23] .

³³⁹It is a very small thing. ³⁴⁰Dadi sent a message.

²⁶⁷

दादी ने सन्देश भेजा कि अभी सभी सेन्टर्स निर्विघ्न हो जाएं उसकी रेसपान्सिबुल टीचर्स हैं .

dādī nē sandēśh bhējā ki abhī sabhī centres nirvighna hō jāē̃ uskī responsible teachers haĩ .

dādī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] nē[postp.] sandēśh[x] bhējnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] ki[conj.] ab[adv.hī] sab[adv.hī] centre nirvighna[adj.] hōnā[opt.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] vah[pn.sg.kī] responsible teacher hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

Dadi ∅ message x[past-part.m.sg.d.] that now all centre free from obstacles be[opt.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] that[.kī] responsible teacher be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

³⁴¹What message did she send? ³⁴²That all centres should now become free from all obstacles. ³⁴³Teachers are responsible for this.

²⁶⁸

अभी तक टीचर्स की कम्पलेन्स आती हैं .

abhī tak teachers kī|key kampalēnsa ātī haĩ .

ab[adv.hī] tak teacher kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key x ānā[pres.pl.f.12hon3] .

now until teacher (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) x come[pres.pl.f.12hon3] .

³⁴⁴However, even now, there are complaints from the teachers.

²⁶⁹

दादियों के पास वह फाइल है ना .

dādiyō̃ kē pās vah file hai nā .

dādī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kē pās[x] vah[pn.sg.d.] file hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā .

Dadi to that file be[pres.sg.23] ∅ .

³⁴⁵The Dadis have a file on this.

²⁷⁰

आफिस वाली ईशू कहती है सेन्टर्स से इतने फालतू लेटर्स आते हैं जो किचड़े का डिब्बा भर जाता है .

office vālī Īśhū kahtī hai centres sē itnē phāltū lēṭarsa ātē haĩ jō kichṛē kā ḍibbā bhar jātā hai .

office vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] Īśhū[n.f.;sg.] kahnā[pres.sg.f.23] centre sē[postp.] itnā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] phāltū[adj.] x ānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] jō[pn.;d.] kichṛā, kīchaṛ[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] ḍabbā, ḍibbā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] bharnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

office those who Ishu say[pres.sg.f.23] centre from such useless x come[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that rubbish of tin fill[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

²⁷¹

ऐसे है ना  ?

aisē hai nā  ?

aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā  ?

such be[pres.sg.23] ∅  ?

³⁴⁶Ishu, who looks after the office, says that, even now, so many unnecessary letters come from the centres that the wastepaper basket becomes full.

²⁷²

यह पढ़ने में भी टाइम लगता , फिर फाड़ने में भी टाइम लगता , फिर बाक्स में डालने में भी टाइम लगता , तो यह मेहनत फालतू हो गई ना .

yah paṛhnē mē̃ bhī time lagtā , phir phāṛnē mē̃ bhī time lagtā , phir box mē̃ ḍālnē mē̃ bhī time lagtā , tō yah mēhnat phāltū hō gaī nā .

yah[pn.sg.d.] paṛhnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] time lagnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] , phir[adv.]|phirnā[root] phāṛnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] time lagnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] , phir[adv.]|phirnā[root] box mē̃[postp.] ḍālnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] time lagnā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] , tō yah[pn.sg.d.] mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] phāltū[adj.] hōnā[past-part.f..root+jānā] nā .

this study[inf.m.pl.,o.] in too time x[pres-part.m.sg.d.] , (then|turn[root]) x[inf.m.pl.,o.] in too time x[pres-part.m.sg.d.] , (then|turn[root]) x in create[inf.m.pl.,o.] in too time x[pres-part.m.sg.d.] , then this effort useless be[past-part.f..root+jānā] ∅ .

³⁴⁷It takes time to read them, it takes time to tear them up, and it also takes time to put them in the wastepaper basket: this is unnecessary effort.

²⁷³

इसलिए बापदादा की शुभ भावना है कि सभी टीचर्स बाप के राइट हैण्डस हैं , लेफ्ट हैण्ड नहीं हैं , राइट हैण्ड हैं .

isliē bāpdādā kī|key śhubh bhāvnā hai ki sabhī teachers bāp kē|K right hands haĩ , left hand nahī̃ haĩ , right hand haĩ .

isliē bāpdādā kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key śhubh bhāvnā[x] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ki[conj.] sab[adv.hī] teacher bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K right hand hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , left hand[x] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , right hand[x] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

therefore BapDada (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) pure feeling be[pres.sg.23] that all teacher father (of|K) right hand be[pres.pl.12hon3] , left hand not be[pres.pl.12hon3] , right hand be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

³⁴⁸Therefore, BapDada’s pure desire is that all teachers should be Baba’s right hands, not left hands, but right hands.

²⁷⁴

राइट हैण्डस के स्थान से , सेन्टर्स से ऐसे समाचार आवें जो वेस्ट बाक्स ही भर जावे - तो ऐसा अच्छा है  ?

right hands kē|K sthān sē , centres sē aisē samāchār āvē̃ jō waste|west box hī bhar jāvē - tō aisā achchhā hai  ?

right hand kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sthān[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] , centre sē[postp.] aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] samāchār[n.m.;sg.,d.] ānā[opt.pl.12hon3] jō[pn.;d.] waste|west box hī[p.] bharnā[opt.sg.23.root+jānā] - tō aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23]  ?

right hand (of|K) place from , centre from such news come[opt.pl.12hon3] that (waste|west) x only fill[opt.sg.23.root+jānā] - then such achcha be[pres.sg.23]  ?

³⁴⁹Is it good if Baba receives so much of this news from the right hands and their centres that the wastepaper basket becomes full? ³⁵⁰Say, “Yes or no!”.

²⁷⁵

बोलो हाँ या ना  ?

bōlō hā̃ yā nā  ?

bōlnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] hā̃ yā nā  ?

speak[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] yes or ∅  ?

³⁵¹Teachers are not saying anything.

²⁷⁶

जो समझते हैं इस वर्ष हम हर एक तीन सर्टिफिकेट लेंगे - स्व विघ्न-विनाशक , सेन्टर विघ्न-विनाशक और साथी विघ्न विनाशक .

jō samajhtē haĩ is varṣh ham har ēk tīn certificate lē̃gē - sva vighna-vināśhak , centre vighna-vināśhak aur sāthī vighna vināśhak .

jō[pn.;d.] samajhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] yah[pn.sg.o.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] ham[pn.pl.] har ēk[x] tīn[adj.] certificate lēnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] - sva vighna vināśhak[n.m.;sg.,d.] , centre vighna vināśhak[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur sāthī[n.m.;sg.,d.] vighna vināśhak[x] .

that understand[pres.pl.m.12hon3] this year we each one x certificate take[fut.m.pl.12hon3] - x destroyer of obstacles , centre destroyer of obstacles and companion destroyer of obstacles .

²⁷⁷

यह तीन सर्टिफिकेट लेने के लिए जो तैयार हैं वह टीचर्स हाथ उठाओ .

yah tīn certificate lēnē kē liē jō taiyār haĩ vah teachers hāth uṭhāō .

yah[pn.sg.d.] tīn[adj.] certificate lēnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kē liē[x] jō[pn.;d.] taiyār[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] vah[pn.sg.d.] teacher hāth uṭhānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

this x certificate take[inf.m.pl.,o.] for that x be[pres.pl.12hon3] that teacher raise your hands .

³⁵²Those who think that each of you will claim the three certificates a destroyer of obstacles of oneself, a destroyer of obstacles of the centre and a destroyer of obstacles of your companions are you ready to claim these three certificates?

²⁷⁸

जो सेन्टर पर पाण्डव रहते हैं , वह भी हाथ उठाओ .

jō centre par pāṇḍav rahtē haĩ , vah bhī hāth uṭhāō .

jō[pn.;d.] centre par[postp.]|par[adj.] pāṇḍav[n.m.;sg.,d.] rahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , vah[pn.sg.d.] bhī[p.] hāth uṭhānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

that centre (at|other) Pandava remain[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , that too raise your hands .

²⁷⁹

( सभी ने हाथ उठाया ) थैंक्यू .

( sabhī nē hāth uṭhāyā ) thaiṅkyū .

( sab[adv.hī] nē[postp.] hāth uṭhānā[past-part.m.sg.d.] ) x .

( all ∅ raise your hands ) x .

³⁵³Now, those teachers should raise their hands. ³⁵⁴You Pandavs who live at a centre should also raise your hands! ³⁵⁵Thank you!

²⁸⁰

अभी वेस्ट पेपर बाक्स खाली रहेंगे .

abhī waste|west paper box khālī rahē̃gē .

ab[adv.hī] waste|west paper box khālī[adj.] rahnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

now (waste|west) paper x empty remain[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

³⁵⁶Now, the wastepaper baskets will remain empty.

²⁸¹

पढ़ना नहीं पड़ेगा .

paṛhnā nahī̃ paṛēgā .

paṛhnā[inf.m.sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] paṛnā[fut.m.sg.23] .

study[inf.m.sg.d.] not fall[fut.m.sg.23] .

³⁵⁷You will not have to read such letters.

²⁸²

यह ( ईशू ) कहती है लेटर्स खोल-खोलकर हाथ थक जाता है .

yah ( Īśhū ) kahtī hai lēṭarsa khōl-khōlakar hāth thak jātā hai .

yah[pn.sg.d.] ( Īśhū[n.f.;sg.] ) kahnā[pres.sg.f.23] x x hāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] thaknā, phathaknā[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

this ( Ishu ) say[pres.sg.f.23] x x hand become desperate[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

³⁵⁸This one says that, just by opening the letters, her hands become tired.

²⁸³

तो इसीलिए चाहे यहाँ बैठे हैं , चाहे विदेश में सुन रहे हैं , चाहे देश में सुन रहे हैं , चाहे मुरली सुनेंगे .

tō isīliē chāhē yahā̃ baiṭhē haĩ , chāhē vidēśh mē̃ sun rahē haĩ , chāhē dēśh mē̃ sun rahē haĩ , chāhē murlī sunē̃gē .

tō isīliē chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] yahā̃ baiṭhnā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] , chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] sunnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] , chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] dēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] sunnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] , chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] murlī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] sunnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

²⁸⁴

लेकिन बापदादा की सारे विश्व की निमित्त टीचर्स के प्रति यह शुभ भावना है कि यह वर्ष कोई कम्पलेन्ट नहीं आनी चाहिए .

lēkin bāpdādā kī|key sārē viśhva kī|key nimitt teachers kē prati yah śhubh bhāvnā hai ki yah varṣh kōī complaint nahī̃ ānī chāhiē .

lēkin bāpdādā kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key sārā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] viśhva[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] teacher kē prati[x] yah[pn.sg.d.] śhubh bhāvnā[x] hōnā[pres.sg.23] ki[conj.] yah[pn.sg.d.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kōī[pn.;d.] complaint nahī̃[neg] ānā[.oblig3] .

but BapDada (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) the whole world (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) instrument teacher for this pure feeling be[pres.sg.23] that this year some complaint not come[.oblig3] .

³⁵⁹Therefore, whether you are sitting here, or listening to Baba in a country abroad or in this land; wherever you hear the murli, the one pure desire for the teachers of the entire world that BapDada has this year is: there should be no complaint from anyone.

²⁸⁵

कम्पलेन्ट के फाइल खत्म हो जाएं .

complaint kē|K file khatm hō jāē̃ .

complaint kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K file ḵẖatm[adj.] hōnā[opt.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] .

complaint (of|K) file finished be[opt.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] .

³⁶⁰The file of complaints should now stop. ³⁶¹BapDada too has many files.

²⁸⁶

बापदादा के पास भी बहुत फाइल हैं .

bāpdādā kē pās bhī bahut file haĩ .

bāpdādā kē pās[x] bhī[p.] bahut file hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

BapDada to too very file be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

³⁶²So this year, your file of complaints should stop.

²⁸⁷

तो इस वर्ष कम्पलेन्ट के फाइल खत्म .

tō is varṣh complaint kē|K file khatm .

tō yah[pn.sg.o.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] complaint kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K file ḵẖatm[adj.] .

then this year complaint (of|K) file finished .

²⁸⁸

सब फाइन बन जाएं .

sab fine ban jāē̃ .

sab[adj.] fine bannā[opt.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] .

all fine become[opt.pl.12hon3.root+jānā] .

³⁶³You should all become fine, even more then fine, you should become refined.

²⁸⁹

फाइन से भी रिफाइन .

fine sē bhī refine .

fine sē[postp.] bhī[p.] refine .

fine from too refine .

³⁶⁴You like this, do you not?

²⁹⁰

पसन्द है ना  ?

pasand hai nā  ?

pasand[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā  ?

love be[pres.sg.23] ∅  ?

²⁹¹

कोई कैसा भी हो उनके साथ चलने की विधि सीखो .

kōī kaisā bhī hō unkē sāth chalnē kī|key vidhi sīkhō .

kōī[pn.;d.] kaisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhī[p.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] vah[pn.pl.kē] sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] chalnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key vidhi[n.m.;sg.,d.] sīkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

some how too (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) that[.kē] with continue[inf.m.pl.,o.] (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) method learn[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

³⁶⁵No matter what others are like, learn how to conduct yourself.

²⁹²

कोई क्या भी करता हो , बार-बार विघ्न रूप बन सामने आता हो लेकिन यह विघ्नों में समय लगाना , आखिर यह भी कब तक  ?

kōī kyā bhī kartā hō , bār-bār vighna rūp ban sāmnē ātā hō lēkin yah vighnō̃ mē̃ samay lagānā , ākhir yah bhī kab tak  ?

kōī[pn.;d.] kyā bhī[p.] karnā[x] , bār[n.f.;sg.] vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] rūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[root]|ban[n.m.;sg.,d.] sāmnē ānā[x] lēkin yah[pn.sg.d.] vighna[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] mē̃[postp.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] lagānā[inf.m.sg.d.] , ākhir yah[pn.sg.d.] bhī[p.] kab tak  ?

some what too do[x] , time obstacle Rup (become[root]|x) x come[x] but this obstacle in time attach[inf.m.sg.d.] , at last this too when until  ?

³⁶⁶No matter what others are doing, even if they are repeatedly creating obstacles for you, how much longer are you going to spend your time over these obstacles?

²⁹³

इसका भी समाप्ति समारोह तो होना है ना  ?

iskā bhī samāpti samārōh tō hōnā hai nā  ?

yah[pn.sg.kā] bhī[p.] samāpti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] samārōh[n.m.;sg.,d.] tō hōnā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] nā  ?

this[.kā] too completion ceremony then be[pres.sg.23.oblig1] ∅  ?

²⁹⁴

तो दूसरे को नहीं देखना .

tō dūsrē kō nahī̃ dēkhnā .

tō dūsrā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kō[postp.] nahī̃[neg] dēkhnā[inf.m.sg.d.] .

then other to not see[inf.m.sg.d.] .

³⁶⁷There has to be a completion ceremony for these obstacles also.

²⁹⁵

यह ऐसे करता है , मुझे क्या करना है  ?

yah aisē kartā hai , mujhē kyā karnā hai  ?

yah[pn.sg.d.] aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] karnā[pres.sg.m.23] , maĩ[pn.sg.kō] kyā karnā[pres.sg.23.oblig1]  ?

this such do[pres.sg.m.23] , I[.kō] what do[pres.sg.23.oblig1]  ?

³⁶⁸So, do not look at others to see what each one is doing.

²⁹⁶

अगर वह पहाड़ है तो मुझे किनारा करना है , पहाड़ नहीं हटना है .

agar vah pahāṛ hai tō mujhē kinārā karnā hai , pahāṛ nahī̃ haṭnā hai .

agar vah[pn.sg.d.] pahāṛ[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] tō maĩ[pn.sg.kō] kinārā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] karnā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] , pahāṛ[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] haṭnā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

if that x be[pres.sg.23] then I[.kō] x do[pres.sg.23.oblig1] , x not move backwards[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

³⁶⁹What do you have to do? ³⁷⁰If that one is a mountain, you have to step away from him.

²⁹⁷

यह बदले तो हम बदलें - यह है पहाड़ हटे तो मैं आगे बढूं .

yah badlē|badalē tō ham badalē̃ - yah hai pahāṛ haṭē tō maĩ āgē baḍhū̃ .

yah[pn.sg.d.] badlē|badalnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|badalnā[opt.sg.23] tō ham[pn.pl.] badalnā[opt.pl.12hon3] - yah[pn.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] pahāṛ[n.m.;sg.,d.] haṭnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|haṭnā[opt.sg.23] tō maĩ[pn.sg.d.] āgē x .

this (x|change[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|change[opt.sg.23]) then we change[opt.pl.12hon3] - this be[pres.sg.23] x (move backwards[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|move backwards[opt.sg.23]) then I previously x .

³⁷¹The mountain is not going to move away! ³⁷²You should not think, “I will change if that one changes”.

²⁹⁸

न पहाड़ हटेगा न आप मंजिल पर पहुंच सकेंगे .

na pahāṛ haṭēgā na āp mañjil par pahuñch sakē̃gē .

na[neg] pahāṛ[n.m.;sg.,d.] haṭnā[fut.m.sg.23] na[neg] āp[pn.pl.] mañzil[n.f.;sg.] par[postp.]|par[adj.] pahuñchnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+saknā] .

not x move backwards[fut.m.sg.23] not you destination (at|other) reach[fut.m.pl.12hon3.root+saknā] .

³⁷³Only when the mountain moves can I move forward.

²⁹⁹

इसलिए अगर उस आत्मा के प्रति शुभ भावना है , तो इशारा दिया और मन-बुद्धि से खाली .

isliē agar us ātmā kē prati śhubh bhāvnā hai , tō iśhārā diyā aur man-buddhi sē khālī .

isliē agar vah[pn.sg.o.] ātmā[n.f.;sg.] kē prati[x] śhubh bhāvnā[x] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , tō iśhārā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] dēnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] aur man-buddhi[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] khālī[adj.] .

therefore if that soul for pure feeling be[pres.sg.23] , then signal give[past-part.m.sg.d.] and x from empty .

³⁰⁰

खुद अपने को उस विघ्न स्वरूप बनने वाले के सोच-विचार में नहीं डालो .

khud apnē kō us vighna svarūp bannē vālē kē|K sōch-vichār mē̃ nahī̃ ḍālō .

khud apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kō[postp.] vah[pn.sg.o.] vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sōch-vichār[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] nahī̃[neg] ḍālnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

oneself one’s own to that obstacle form become[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who (of|K) thought in not create[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

³⁷⁴The mountain will not move and you will not be able to reach your destination. ³⁷⁵Therefore, if you have pure feelings for that soul, then just give a signal and thereby remove it from your mind and intellect.

³⁰¹

जब नम्बरवार हैं तो नम्बरवार में स्टेज भी नम्बरवार होनी ही है लेकिन हमको नम्बरवन बनना है .

jab number-vār haĩ tō number-vār mē̃ stage bhī number-vār hōnī hī hai lēkin hamkō number one bannā hai .

jab number-wār hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] tō number-wār mē̃[postp.] stage bhī[p.] number-wār hōnā[inf.f.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin ham[pn.pl.kō] number one bannā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

when numberwise be[pres.pl.12hon3] then numberwise in stage too numberwise be[inf.f.] only be[pres.sg.23] but we[.kō] number one become[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

³⁷⁶Do not engage yourself in thinking about those who are an embodiment of obstacles. ³⁷⁷Since everything is numberwise, each one’s stage will also be numberwise.

³⁰²

ऐसे विघ्न वा व्यर्थ संकल्प चलाने वाली आत्माओं के प्रति स्वयं परिवर्तन होकर उनके प्रति शुभ भावना रखते चलो .

aisē vighna vā vyarth saṅkalp chalānē vālī ātmāō̃ kē prati svayã parivartan hōkar unkē prati śhubh bhāvnā rakhtē chalō .

aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] vā vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] chalānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] ātmā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] kē prati[x] svayã parivartan[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[abs.] vah[pn.pl.kē] prati śhubh bhāvnā[x] rakhnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] chalnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

such obstacle or wasteful thought x[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who soul for x transformation be[abs.] that[.kē] for pure feeling keep[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] continue[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

³⁷⁸However, you have to become number one. ³⁷⁹Transform yourself and have good wishes for those who become obstacles and those souls who have waste thoughts.

³⁰³

टाइम थोड़ा लगता है , मेहनत थोड़ी लगती है लेकिन आखिर जो स्व-परिवर्तन करता है , विजय की माला उसी के गले में पड़ती है .

time thōṛā lagtā hai , mēhnat thōṛī lagtī hai lēkin ākhir jō sva-parivartan kartā hai , vijay kī|key mālā usī kē|K galē mē̃ paṛtī hai .

time thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] lagnā[pres.sg.m.23] , mēhnat[n.f.;sg.] thōṛā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] lagnā[pres.sg.f.23] lēkin ākhir jō[pn.;d.] sva-parivartan[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[pres.sg.m.23] , vijay[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key mālā[n.f.;sg.] vah[pn.sg.hī] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K galnā[opt.sg.23]|galnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|galā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] mē̃[postp.] paṛnā[pres.sg.f.23] .

³⁸⁰It takes a little time and a little effort, but, ultimately, the garland of victory will be placed around the neck of those who bring about selftransformation.

³⁰⁴

शुभ भावना से अगर उसको परिवर्तन कर सकते हो तो करो , नहीं तो इशारा दो , अपनी रेसपान्सिबिल्टी खत्म कर दो और स्व परिवर्तन कर आगे उड़ते चलो .

śhubh bhāvnā sē agar uskō parivartan kar saktē hō tō karō , nahī̃ tō iśhārā dō , apnī responsibility khatm kar dō aur sva parivartan kar āgē uṛtē chalō .

śhubh bhāvnā[x] sē[postp.] agar vah[pn.sg.kō] parivartan[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] tō karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , nahī̃ tō[x] iśhārā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] dēnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]|dō[adj.] , apnā[pn.ā=>ī;f.] responsibility ḵẖatm[adj.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+dēnā] aur sva parivartan[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[root] āgē uṛnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] chalnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

pure feeling from if that[.kō] transformation do[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] then do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , otherwise signal (give[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]|two) , one’s own responsibility finished do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+dēnā] and x transformation do[root] previously fly[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] continue[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

³⁸¹If you are able to bring about transformation in those souls through your good wishes, then do so. ³⁸²Otherwise, just give a signal! ³⁸³Put an end to your responsibility, and bring about transformation in yourself and continue to fly ahead.

³⁰⁵

यह विघ्न रूप भी सोने का लगाव का धागा है .

yah vighna rūp bhī sōnē kā lagāv kā dhāgā hai .

yah[pn.sg.d.] vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] rūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] sōnā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.]|sōnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] lagāv[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] dhāgā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

this obstacle Rup too (gold|sleep[inf.m.pl.,o.]) of attachment of thread be[pres.sg.23] .

³⁰⁶

यह भी उड़ने नहीं देगा .

yah bhī uṛnē nahī̃ dēgā .

yah[pn.sg.d.] bhī[p.] uṛnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] nahī̃[neg] dēnā[fut.m.sg.23] .

this too fly[inf.m.pl.,o.] not give[fut.m.sg.23] .

³⁸⁴This obstacle is also a golden thread of attachment that stops you from flying.

³⁰⁷

यह बहुत महीन और बहुत सत्यता के पर्दे का धागा है .

yah bahut mahīn aur bahut satyatā kē|K pardē kā dhāgā hai .

yah[pn.sg.d.] bahut mahīn[adj.] aur bahut satyatā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K pardā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] dhāgā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

this very refined and very truth (of|K) curtains of thread be[pres.sg.23] .

³⁸⁵It is a very subtle thread behind the curtain of truth.

³⁰⁸

यही सोचते हैं यह तो सच्ची बात है ना .

yahī sōchtē haĩ yah tō sachchī bāt hai nā .

yahī[pn.;d.] sōchnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] yah[pn.sg.d.] tō sachchā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā .

this think[pres.pl.m.12hon3] this then true matter be[pres.sg.23] ∅ .

³⁸⁶You then think, “This is true, isn’t it? ³⁸⁷This happens all the time.

³⁰⁹

यह तो होता है ना .

yah tō hōtā hai nā .

yah[pn.sg.d.] tō hōnā[pres.sg.m.23] nā .

this then be[pres.sg.m.23] ∅ .

³⁸⁸This should not happen.”

³¹⁰

यह तो होना नहीं चाहिए ना .

yah tō hōnā nahī̃ chāhiē nā .

yah[pn.sg.d.] tō hōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] chāhiē|chāhnā[imp.pl.2hon] nā .

this then be[inf.m.sg.d.] not (should|x[imp.pl.2hon]) ∅ .

³¹¹

लेकिन कब तक देखते , कब तक रूकते रहेंगे  ?

lēkin kab tak dēkhtē , kab tak rūktē rahē̃gē  ?

lēkin kab tak dēkhnā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] , kab tak ruknā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā]  ?

but when until see[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] , when until stop[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā]  ?

³⁸⁹However, for how much longer are you going to keep on seeing all those things and stopping?

³¹²

अब तो स्वयं को महीन धागों से भी मुक्त करो .

ab tō svayã kō mahīn dhāgō̃ sē bhī mukt karō .

ab[adv.] tō svayã kō[postp.] mahīn[adj.] dhāgā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] bhī[p.] mukt[adj.] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

now then x to refined thread from too free do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

³¹³

मुक्ति वर्ष मनाओ .

mukti varṣh manāō .

mukti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] manānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

liberation year celebrate[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

³⁹⁰Now, liberate yourself from these subtle threads and celebrate the Year of Liberation.

³¹⁴

इसलिए बच्चों की जो आशायें हैं , उमंग है , उत्साह है , इसके सभी फंक्शन मनाकर बापदादा पूरे कर रहे हैं .

isliē bachchō̃ kī|key jō āśhāyē̃ haĩ , umaṅg hai , utsāh hai , iskē sabhī function manākar bāpdādā pūrē kar rahē haĩ .

isliē bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key jō[pn.;d.] āśh, āśhā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , umaṅg[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , utsāh[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , yah[pn.sg.kē] sab[adv.hī] function manānā[abs.] bāpdādā pūrā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] karnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

therefore child (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) that desire be[pres.pl.12hon3] , zeal be[pres.sg.23] , enthusiasm be[pres.sg.23] , this[.kē] all x celebrate[abs.] BapDada full do[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

³⁹¹This is why BapDada is celebrating the different functions with you and fulfilling your hopes, desires, zeal and enthusiasm.

³¹⁵

लेकिन इस वर्ष का अन्तिम फंक्शन मुक्ति वर्ष का फंक्शन हो .

lēkin is varṣh kā antim function mukti varṣh kā function hō .

lēkin yah[pn.sg.o.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] antim[adj.] function mukti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] function hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] .

but this year of final x liberation year of x (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

³⁹²The last function of this year will be a function for the Year of Liberation. ³⁹³Achcha.

³¹⁶

फंक्शन में दादियों को सौगात भी देते हो .

function mē̃ dādiyō̃ kō saugāt bhī dētē hō .

function mē̃[postp.] dādī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] saugāt[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.2] .

x in Dadi to gift too give[pres.pl.m.2] .

³⁹⁴Today, there are many varieties of groups. ³⁹⁵At functions, Dadis are given gifts.

³¹⁷

तो बापदादा को इस मुक्त वर्ष के फंक्शन में स्वयं के सम्पूर्णता की गिफ्ट देना .

tō bāpdādā kō is mukt varṣh kē|K function mē̃ svayã kē|K sampūrṇtā kī|key gift dēnā .

tō bāpdādā kō[postp.] yah[pn.sg.o.] mukt[adj.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K function mē̃[postp.] svayã kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sampūrṇtā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key gift dēnā[inf.m.sg.d.] .

then BapDada to this free year (of|K) x in x (of|K) perfection (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) gift give[inf.m.sg.d.] .

³⁹⁶You give them gifts, do you not? ³⁹⁷So in the function of the Year of Liberation, give BapDada the gift of your perfection.

³¹⁸

अच्छा .

achchhā .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] .

achcha .

³⁹⁸Achcha.

³¹⁹

महाराष्ट्र के सेवाधारियों से - यह रसम अच्छी बनाई है .

mahārāṣhṭra kē|K sēvādhāriyō̃ sē - yah rasam achchhī banāī hai .

mahārāṣhṭra[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sēvādhārī[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] - yah[pn.sg.d.] rasm[n.f.;sg.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] banānā[pres-perf.sg.f.23] .

Maharashtra (of|K) server from - this systems achcha create[pres-perf.sg.f.23] .

³²⁰

अच्छा है , सेवा से सभी को ब्राह्मण परिवार के समीप आने का चांस मिलता है .

achchhā hai , sēvā sē sabhī kō brāhmaṇ parivār kē|K samīp ānē kā chance miltā hai .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , sēvā[n.f.;sg.] sē[postp.] sab[adv.hī] kō[postp.] brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] parivār[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K samīp[adj.] ānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.]|ānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] chance milnā[pres.sg.m.23] .

achcha be[pres.sg.23] , service from all to Brahmin family (of|K) close (x|come[inf.m.pl.,o.]) of chance receive[pres.sg.m.23] .

³⁹⁹To the servers from Maharashtra (those responsible for this meeting with BapDada.)You have created a good system. ⁴⁰⁰It is good that everyone in the Brahmin family is given the chance to come close?

³²¹

निर्विघ्न सेवा हुई तो हाथ उठाओ .

nirvighna sēvā huī tō hāth uṭhāō .

nirvighna[adj.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[past-part.f.] tō hāth uṭhānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

free from obstacles service be[past-part.f.] then raise your hands .

⁴⁰¹Was your service free from obstacles?

³²²

महाराष्ट्र के सेवाधारियों ने बेहद की सेवा की तो बेहद की दुआयें ली .

mahārāṣhṭra kē|K sēvādhāriyō̃ nē bēhad kī|key sēvā kī|key tō bēhad kī|key duāyē̃ lī .

⁴⁰²Servers from Maharashtra, raise your hands! ⁴⁰³By doing unlimited service, you have received unlimited blessings.

³²³

आपके खाते में बेहद की दुआयें जमा हो गई .

āpkē khātē mē̃ bēhad kī|key duāyē̃ jamā hō gaī .

āp[pn.pl.kē] khātā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.]|khānā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] mē̃[postp.] bēhad[adj.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key duā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] jamnā[x] jānā[past-part.f.] .

you[.kē] (account|eat[pres-part.m.pl.,o.]) in unlimited (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) blessing x[x] go[past-part.f.] .

⁴⁰⁴Unlimited blessings have been accumulated in your account.

³²⁴

सबने सेवा का लाभ उठाया ना .

sabnē sēvā kā lābh uṭhāyā nā .

sabnē sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] lābh[n.m.;sg.,d.] uṭhānā[past-part.m.sg.d.] nā .

x service of x uplift[past-part.m.sg.d.] ∅ .

³²⁵

सभी को अच्छा लगा ना .

sabhī kō achchhā lagā nā .

sab[adv.hī] kō[postp.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] lagā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.]|lagānā[root]|lagnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] nā .

all to achcha (x|attach[root]|x[past-part.m.sg.d.]) ∅ .

⁴⁰⁵All of you took benefit from your service, did you not?

³²⁶

बहुत अच्छा .

bahut achchhā .

bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] .

very achcha .

⁴⁰⁶You liked it, didn’t you?

³²⁷

महाराष्ट्र के मुख्य सेवाधारी उठो .

mahārāṣhṭra kē|K mukhya sēvādhārī uṭhō .

mahārāṣhṭra[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K mukhya[adj.] sēvādhārī[n.m.;sg.,d.] uṭhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

Maharashtra (of|K) main server wake up[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴⁰⁷Did all of you like it very much?

³²⁸

बापदादा सभी महाराष्ट्र के निमित्त सेवाधारियों को निर्विघ्न सेवाधारी की मुबारक देते हैं .

bāpdādā sabhī mahārāṣhṭra kē nimitt sēvādhāriyō̃ kō nirvighna sēvādhārī kī|key mubārak dētē haĩ .

bāpdādā sab[adv.hī] mahārāṣhṭra[n.m.;sg.,d.] kē nimitt[x] sēvādhārī[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] nirvighna[adj.] sēvādhārī[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key mubārak[n.f.;sg.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

BapDada all Maharashtra x server to free from obstacles server (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) congratulations give[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁴⁰⁸Main servers of Maharashtra, stand up! ⁴⁰⁹BapDada is congratulating the instrument servers of Maharashtra for being servers free from obstacles.

³²⁹

अच्छा .

achchhā .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] .

achcha .

³³⁰

सिक्युरिटी वालों को रोज़ दादियों से गुडमोर्निंग या गुडनाइट करनी चाहिए .

security vālō̃ kō rōz dādiyō̃ sē goodmorning yā good night karnī chāhiē .

security vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] rōz dādī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] good morning yā good night karnā[.oblig3] .

security those who to day Dadi from good morning or x do[.oblig3] .

⁴¹⁰Achcha, those who are on security duty should say good morning and good night to the Dadis every day.

³³¹

उन्हों की सेवा ज्यादा है .

unhō̃ kī|key sēvā jyādā hai .

vah[pn.pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key sēvā[n.f.;sg.] jyādā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

that (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) service more be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴¹¹They have to do a lot of service.

³³²

अच्छा .

achchhā .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] .

achcha .

⁴¹²Achcha.

³³³

सिक्युरिटी वालों ने निर्विघ्न अपना टर्न पूरा किया है , यह बहुत हिम्मत का काम है .

security vālō̃ nē nirvighna apnā turn pūrā kiyā hai , yah bahut himmat kā kām hai .

security vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] nē[postp.] nirvighna[adj.] apnā[pn.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.]|apnānā[root] tum pūrā karnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] , yah[pn.sg.d.] bahut himmat[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] kām[n.m.;sg.,d.]|kām[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

security those who ∅ free from obstacles (one’s own|adopt[root]) you make full , this very courage of (lust|task) be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴¹³Those who are on security duty have completed their turn whilst remaining free from obstacles. ⁴¹⁴This is very courageous work.

³³⁴

( डबल विदेशी कहते हैं एक मेला हम भी सम्भाल सकते हैं ) कम से कम सभी विदेश का खाना तो खायेंगे .

( double vidēśhī kahtē haĩ ēk mēlā ham bhī sambhāl saktē haĩ ) kam sē kam sabhī vidēśh kā khānā tō khāyēṅgē .

( double vidēśhī[n.m.;sg.,d.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] ēk[adj.] mēlā[x] ham[pn.pl.] bhī[p.] sambhālnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] ) kam sē kam[x] sab[adv.hī] vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] khānā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|khānā[inf.m.sg.d.] tō khānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

( double foreigner say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] one fair we too be careful[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] ) at least all abroad of (eat[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|eat[inf.m.sg.d.]) then eat[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

⁴¹⁵Doubleforeigners are saying that they can also look after a mela. ⁴¹⁶At least everyone would eat foreign food!

³³⁵

अच्छा है जो सेवा की आफर करते हैं उसको पहले ही इन-एडवांस आफरीन है .

achchhā hai jō sēvā kī|key offer kartē haĩ uskō pahlē hī in advance āphrīn hai .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] jō[pn.;d.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key offer karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] vah[pn.sg.kō] pahlā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|pahlē[adv.] hī[p.] in advance āphrīn hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

achcha be[pres.sg.23] that service (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) offer do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that[.kō] (x|firstly) only in advance thanks be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴¹⁷It is good. ⁴¹⁸Those who offer themselves for service receive thanks in advance.

³³⁶

डबल विदेशी विशेष आत्मायें पहुंच गई हैं और पहुंचते जायेंगे .

double vidēśhī viśhēṣh ātmāyē̃ pahuñch gaī haĩ aur pahuñchtē jāyēṅgē .

double vidēśhī[n.m.;sg.,d.] viśhēṣh[adj.] ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] pahuñchnā[pres-perf.pl.f.12hon3.root+jānā] aur pahuñchnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+jānā] .

double foreigner special soul reach[pres-perf.pl.f.12hon3.root+jānā] and reach[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+jānā] .

⁴¹⁹The special doubleforeign souls have arrived here and more are continuing to come.

³³⁷

बापदादा विदेश की चारों ओर की सेवा देख , उमंग-उत्साह देख हर्षित होते हैं क्योंकि जब विदेश सेवा आरम्भ हुई तो जो भी मुश्किल बातें लगती थी वह अभी इतनी सहज हो गई हैं जो सभी सेवा में उड़ते रहते हैं .

bāpdādā vidēśh kī|key chārō̃ ōr kī|key sēvā dēkh , umaṅg-utsāh dēkh harṣhit hōtē haĩ kyōṅki jab vidēśh sēvā ārambh huī tō jō bhī muśhkil bātē̃ lagtī thī vah abhī itnī sahaj hō gaī haĩ jō sabhī sēvā mē̃ uṛtē rahtē haĩ .

bāpdādā vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key chārō̃ ōr[x] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key sēvā[n.f.;sg.] dēkhnā[root] , umaṅg-utsāh[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēkhnā[root] harṣhit[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] kyōṅki jab vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] ārambh[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[past-part.f.] tō jō[pn.;d.] bhī[p.] muśhkil[adj.] bāt[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] lagnā[hab-past.f.] vah[pn.sg.d.] ab[adv.hī] itnā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] sahaj[adj.] hōnā[pres-perf.pl.f.12hon3.root+jānā] jō[pn.;d.] sab[adv.hī] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] uṛnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā] .

BapDada abroad (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) everywhere (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) service see[root] , zeal and enthusiasm see[root] cheerful be[pres.pl.m.12hon3] because when abroad service x be[past-part.f.] then that too difficult matter x[hab-past.f.] that now such easy be[pres-perf.pl.f.12hon3.root+jānā] that all service in fly[pres.pl.m.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā] .

⁴²⁰Seeing the service of the double foreigners in all directions and their zeal and enthusiasm, BapDada is very happy. ⁴²¹Whatever you found difficult in the beginning, when foreign service began, has now become easy; it enables everyone to fly in service.

³³⁸

पहले सोचते थे विदेश में बड़ा प्रोग्राम करें तो सुनने वालों से हाल भरना बहुत मुश्किल है .

pahlē sōchtē thē vidēśh mē̃ baṛā programme karē̃ tō sunnē vālō̃ sē hall|hāl bharnā bahut muśhkil hai .

pahlā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|pahlē[adv.] sōchnā[hab-past.pl.m.] vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] baṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] programme karnā[opt.pl.12hon3] tō sunnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] hall|hāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] bharnā[inf.m.sg.d.] bahut muśhkil[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

(x|firstly) think[hab-past.pl.m.] abroad in very programme do[opt.pl.12hon3] then listen[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who from (hall|x) fill[inf.m.sg.d.] very difficult be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴²²When you had big programs in the early days, you had to think a great deal and it was very difficult to fill a hall.

³³⁹

वी . आई . पी . की सेवा बहुत मुश्किल है .

we|V . āī|eye|I . P|pī . kī|key sēvā bahut muśhkil hai .

⁴²³You felt it was very difficult to serve VIP’s.

³⁴⁰

लेकिन अभी क्या कहते हैं  ?

lēkin abhī kyā kahtē haĩ  ?

lēkin ab[adv.hī] kyā kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3]  ?

but now what say[pres.pl.m.12hon3]  ?

⁴²⁴However, what do you think now?

³⁴¹

अभी तो यू . एन . तक भी पहुंच गये हैं .

abhī tō U|you . N . tak bhī pahuñch gayē haĩ .

ab[adv.hī] tō U|you . N . tak bhī[p.] pahuñchnā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] .

now then (U.|x) . x . until too reach[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3.root+jānā] .

⁴²⁵Now, you have even reached the UN! ⁴²⁶Has it become easy or difficult?

³⁴²

तो बहुत सहज हो गया है ना .

tō bahut sahaj hō gayā hai nā .

tō bahut sahaj[adj.] hōnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23.root+jānā] nā .

then very easy be[pres-perf.sg.m.23.root+jānā] ∅ .

⁴²⁷What has it become? ⁴²⁸Was it easy?

³⁴³

बापदादा सदा कहते हैं कितने भी बड़े हों , उन्हों के पास पावर है , आपके पास परमात्म विल पावर है .

bāpdādā sadā kahtē haĩ kitnē bhī baṛē hō̃ , unhō̃ kē pās power hai , āpkē pās|pass paramātma will power hai .

bāpdādā sadā kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] kitnā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhī[p.] baṛā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[opt.pl.12hon3] , vah[pn.pl.o.] kē pās[x] power hōnā[pres.sg.23] , āp[pn.pl.kē] pās|pass paramātmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] will power hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

BapDada constantly say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] so too very be[opt.pl.12hon3] , that to power be[pres.sg.23] , you[.kē] (x|pass) Supreme Soul will power be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴²⁹It was very easy. ⁴³⁰BapDada always says: No matter how great they are, no matter how much power they have, you have God’s will power!

³⁴⁴

परमात्मा ने पावर्स की विल की है , तो विल पावर है .

paramātmā nē powers kī|key will kī hai , tō will power hai .

paramātmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] nē[postp.] power kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key will karnā[pres-perf.sg.f.23] , tō will power hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

Supreme Soul ∅ power (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) will do[pres-perf.sg.f.23] , then will power be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴³¹God has willed you all the powers. ⁴³²So, you have willpower.

³⁴⁵

तो परमात्म विल पावर के आगे पावर्स परिवार्तित होना कोई बड़ी बात नहीं है सिर्फ स्वयं में एक संकल्प हो - होना ही है .

tō paramātma will power kē āgē powers parivārtit hōnā kōī baṛī bāt nahī̃ hai sirph svayã mē̃ ēk saṅkalp hō - hōnā hī hai .

tō paramātmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] will power kē āgē[x] power x hōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] kōī[pn.;d.] baṛā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] sirph[adj.] svayã mē̃[postp.] ēk[adj.] saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] - hōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

then Supreme Soul will power in front of power x be[inf.m.sg.d.] some very matter not be[pres.sg.23] only x in one thought (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) - be[inf.m.sg.d.] only be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴³³For the powers (authorities) to be transformed by God’s willpower is not a big thing. ⁴³⁴Simply have just one thought within yourself: It has to happen.

³⁴⁶

यह तो नहीं होगा , वह तो नहीं होगा , पता नहीं क्या होगा … यह परमात्म टचिंग उन्हों की बुद्धि में जाने से रूकावट बन जाती है .

yah tō nahī̃ hōgā , vah tō nahī̃ hōgā , patā nahī̃ kyā hōgā … yah paramātma touching unhō̃ kī|key buddhi mē̃ jānē sē rūkāvaṭ ban jātī hai .

yah[pn.sg.d.] tō nahī̃[neg] hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] , vah[pn.sg.d.] tō nahī̃[neg] hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] , patā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] kyā hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] … yah[pn.sg.d.] paramātmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] touching vah[pn.pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key buddhi[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] jānnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|jānā[inf.m.pl.,o.]|jānnā[opt.sg.23] sē[postp.] rūkāvaṭ[n.f.;sg.] bannā[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] .

this then not be[fut.m.sg.23] , that then not be[fut.m.sg.23] , knowledge not what be[fut.m.sg.23] … this Supreme Soul touching that (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) intellect in (know[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|go[inf.m.pl.,o.]|know[opt.sg.23]) from obstruction become[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] .

⁴³⁵By having such thoughts as, “This is not possible, that is not possible, I don’t know what will happen”. ⁴³⁶This creates an obstruction in their intellects to be able to experience a touching from God.

³⁴⁷

चाहे देश में , चाहे विदेश में - क्यों , कैसा , ऐसा तो नहीं , इस संकल्प से कभी भी कोई कार्य अर्थ सामने नहीं जाओ .

chāhē dēśh mē̃ , chāhē vidēśh mē̃ - kyō̃ , kaisā , aisā tō nahī̃ , is saṅkalp sē kabhī bhī kōī kārya arth|earth sāmnē nahī̃ jāō .

chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] dēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] , chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] - kyō̃ , kaisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] , aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] tō nahī̃[neg] , yah[pn.sg.o.] saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] kabhī[adv.] bhī[p.] kōī[pn.;d.] kārya[n.m.;sg.,d.] arth[n.m.;sg.,d.]|earth sāmnē nahī̃[neg] jānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴³⁷Whether in this land or abroad, do not go in front of those people with doubtful thoughts such as, “Why? ⁴³⁸What? ⁴³⁹It shouldn't be like this”, for any task. ⁴⁴⁰First of all, discuss and finalise, “What?

³⁴⁸

क्यों , क्या , ऐसा , वैसा - यह पहले आपस में सोच के फाइनल करो , वह बात अलग है लेकिन जब सामने जाते हो तो सदा दृढ़ संकल्प से जाओ - होना ही है .

kyō̃ , kyā , aisā , vaisā - yah pahlē āpas mē̃ sōch kē|K final karō , vah bāt alag hai lēkin jab sāmnē jātē hō tō sadā dr̥iṛh saṅkalp sē jāō - hōnā hī hai .

kyō̃ , kyā , aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] , vaisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] - yah[pn.sg.d.] pahlā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|pahlē[adv.] āpas mē̃[x] sōchnā[root] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K final karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , vah[pn.sg.d.] bāt[n.f.;sg.] alag[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin jab sāmnē jānā[pres.pl.m.2] tō sadā dr̥iṛh[adj.] saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] jānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] - hōnā[inf.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

why , what , such , x - this (x|firstly) with each other think[root] (of|K) final do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , that matter separate be[pres.sg.23] but when x go[pres.pl.m.2] then constantly determined thought from go[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] - be[inf.m.sg.d.] only be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴⁴¹Why? ⁴⁴²Like this! ⁴⁴³Like that!” etc. amongst yourselves; that is a different thing. ⁴⁴⁴However, when you go in front of them, go with the determined thought that it has to happen.

³⁴⁹

आखिर तो सभी को झुकना ही है .

ākhir tō sabhī kō jhuknā hī hai .

ākhir tō sab[adv.hī] kō[postp.] jhuknā[inf.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

at last then all to x[inf.m.sg.d.] only be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴⁴⁵Everyone will ultimately have to bow down.

³⁵⁰

तो विदेश भी सेवा में उड़ रहा है , भारत की सेवा और विदेश की सेवा दोनों उड़ती कला में हैं .

tō vidēśh bhī sēvā mē̃ uṛ rahā hai , bhārat kī|key sēvā aur vidēśh kī|key sēvā dōnō̃ uṛtī kalā mē̃ haĩ .

tō vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] uṛnā[pres.sg.m.prog.23] , bhārat[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key sēvā[n.f.;sg.] aur vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key sēvā[n.f.;sg.] dōnō̃ uṛnā[pres-part.f.] kalā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

then abroad too service in fly[pres.sg.m.prog.23] , Bharat (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) service and abroad (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) service x fly[pres-part.f.] degree in be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

⁴⁴⁶So, the foreign lands are also flying in service. ⁴⁴⁷The service in Bharat and the service abroad are both in their flying stage.

³⁵¹

अभी सेवा में सकाश दे , बुद्धियों को परिवर्तन करने की सेवा एड करो .

abhī sēvā mē̃ sakāśh dē , buddhiyō̃ kō parivartan karnē kī|key sēvā add karō .

ab[adv.hī] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] sakāśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[opt.sg.23]|dēnā[root] , buddhi[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] parivartan[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key sēvā[n.f.;sg.] add karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

now service in sakaash (give[opt.sg.23]|give[root]) , intellect to transformation do[inf.m.pl.,o.] (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) service add do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

³⁵²

फिर देखो सफलता आपके सामने स्वयं झुकेगी .

phir dēkhō saphaltā āpkē sāmnē svayã jhukēgī .

phir[adv.]|phirnā[root] dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] saphaltā[n.f.;sg.] āp[pn.pl.kē] sāmnē svayã jhuknā[fut.f.sg.23] .

(then|turn[root]) see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] success you[.kē] x x x[fut.f.sg.23] .

⁴⁴⁸Now, put the current of light and might into service and add the service of transforming their intellects.

³⁵³

ठीक है ना  ?

ṭhīk hai nā  ?

ṭhīk[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā  ?

OK be[pres.sg.23] ∅  ?

³⁵⁴

विदेश में अनुभव है ना  ?

vidēśh mē̃ anubhav hai nā  ?

vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] anubhav[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā  ?

abroad in experience be[pres.sg.23] ∅  ?

⁴⁴⁹Then see how success bows down in front of you.

³⁵⁵

अच्छा है .

achchhā hai .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

achcha be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴⁵⁰Is this OK?

³⁵⁶

सेवाओं का समाचार बापदादा के पास पहुंचता है .

sēvāō̃ kā samāchār bāpdādā kē pās pahuñchtā hai .

sēvā[x] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] samāchār[n.m.;sg.,d.] bāpdādā kē pās[x] pahuñchnā[pres.sg.m.23] .

service of news BapDada to reach[pres.sg.m.23] .

⁴⁵¹You have this experience abroad, do you not?

³⁵⁷

विघ्न भी आते हैं , लेकिन आगे का पर्दा विघ्न का होता है , पर्दे के अन्दर कल्याण समाया हुआ दृश्य छिपा हुआ होता है .

vighna bhī ātē haĩ , lēkin āgē kā pardā vighna kā hōtā hai , pardē kē|K andar kalyāṇ samāyā huā dr̥iśhya chhipā huā hōtā hai .

vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] ānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , lēkin āgē kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] pardā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23] , pardā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K andar kalyāṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] samānā[past-part.m.sg.d.] hōnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] dr̥iśhya[n.m.;sg.,d.] chhipnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]|chhipānā[root] hōnā[past-part.m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23] .

obstacle too come[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , but previously of curtains obstacle of be[pres.sg.m.23] , curtains (of|K) inside benefit merge[past-part.m.sg.d.] be[past-part.m.sg.d.] x (secretly[past-part.m.sg.d.]|hide[root]) be[past-part.m.sg.d.] be[pres.sg.m.23] .

⁴⁵²Service news reaches BapDada. ⁴⁵³You do have obstacles, although at first the curtain appears to be an obstacle, hidden behind that curtain, is a scene of benefit.

³⁵⁸

मन्सा-वाचा की शक्ति से विघ्न का पर्दा हटा दो तो अन्दर कल्याण का दृश्य दिखाई दे .

mansā-vāchā kī|key śhakti sē vighna kā pardā haṭā dō tō andar kalyāṇ kā dr̥iśhya dikhāī dē .

mansā-vāchā kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key śhakti[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] sē[postp.] vighna[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] pardā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] haṭānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+dēnā] tō andar kalyāṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] dr̥iśhya[n.m.;sg.,d.] dikhāī dēnā[opt.sg.23] .

x (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) Shakti from obstacle of curtains remove[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+dēnā] then inside benefit of x be visible .

⁴⁵⁴With the power of your mind and words, remove the curtain of that obstacle and you will be able to see the benevolent scene behind.

³⁵⁹

बाकी सभी विदेश के सेन्टर्स के बच्चे बहुत अच्छे-अच्छे कार्ड भी भेजते हैं , पत्र भी भेजते हैं , कोई आता है तो बहुत-बहुत यादप्यार भी भेजते हैं .

bākī sabhī vidēśh kē|K centres kē|K bachchē bahut achchhē-achchhē card bhī bhējtē haĩ , patra bhī bhējtē haĩ , kōī ātā hai tō bahut-bahut yādpyār bhī bhējtē haĩ .

bākī|bākī sab[adv.hī] vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K centre kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] card bhī[p.] bhējnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , patra[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] bhējnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , kōī[pn.;d.] ānā[pres.sg.m.23] tō bahut yād-pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] bhējnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

(others|but) all abroad (of|K) centre (of|K) child very achcha card too x[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , x too x[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , some come[pres.sg.m.23] then very love, remembrance too x[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁴⁵⁵All the children at all the centres abroad send many beautiful cards and letters. ⁴⁵⁶When someone comes, you send lots and lots of love and remembrance.

³⁶⁰

बापदादा भी कार्ड को रिगार्ड देते हैं .

bāpdādā bhī card kō regard dētē haĩ .

bāpdādā bhī[p.] card kō[postp.] regard dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

BapDada too card to regard give[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁴⁵⁷BapDada also has regard for those cards.

³⁶¹

दिल से भेजते हैं , दिखावे से नहीं भेजें .

dil sē bhējtē haĩ , dikhāvē sē nahī̃ bhējē̃ .

dil[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] bhējnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , dikhāvā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] sē[postp.] nahī̃[neg] bhējnā[opt.pl.12hon3] .

heart from x[pres.pl.m.12hon3] , x from not x[opt.pl.12hon3] .

⁴⁵⁸They are sent from the heart, do not send them for show.

³⁶²

दिखावे से भेजना वह एकानामी होनी चाहिए और दिल से भेजते हैं तो उसका कोई मूल्य नहीं है .

dikhāvē sē bhējnā vah economy hōnī chāhiē aur dil sē bhējtē haĩ tō uskā kōī mūlya nahī̃ hai .

dikhāvā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] sē[postp.] bhējnā[inf.m.sg.d.] vah[pn.sg.d.] economy hōnā[.oblig3] aur dil[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] bhējnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] tō vah[pn.sg.kā] kōī[pn.;d.] mūlya[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

x from x[inf.m.sg.d.] that economical be[.oblig3] and heart from x[pres.pl.m.12hon3] then that[.kā] some value not be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴⁵⁹There should be economy when it comes to sending them for show. ⁴⁶⁰However, when you send them from your heart, they are invaluable!

³⁶³

तो हर एक के साइन किये हुए बहुत कार्ड बापदादा के पास हर उत्सव के पहुंचते हैं .

tō har ēk kē|K sign kiyē huē bahut card bāpdādā kē pās har|her utsav kē|K pahuñchtē haĩ .

tō har ēk[x] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sign karnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] hōnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] bahut card bāpdādā kē pās[x] harnā[root]|har|her utsav[x] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K pahuñchnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

then each one (of|K) sign do[past-part.m.pl.,o.] be[past-part.m.pl.,o.] very card BapDada to (x[root]|x) x (of|K) reach[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁴⁶¹Many cards, signed by everyone, are received by BapDada on every occasion.

³⁶⁴

भारतवासियों के भी पहुंचते हैं .

bhāratvāsiyō̃ kē|K bhī pahuñchtē haĩ .

bhāratvāsī[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K bhī[p.] pahuñchnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

people of Bharat (of|K) too reach[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁴⁶²BapDada receives cards from Bharatwasis also.

³⁶⁵

बापदादा सभी कार्डस और पत्रों का एक ही जवाब देते हैं - मुबारक हो , बधाईयां हो , सदा सफल रहो और औरों को भी सफलता स्वरूप बनाते उड़ो .

bāpdādā sabhī cards aur patrō̃ kā ēk hī javāb dētē haĩ - mubārak hō , badhāīyā̃ hō , sadā saphal rahō aur aurō̃ kō bhī saphaltā svarūp banātē uṛō .

bāpdādā sab[adv.hī] card aur patra[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] ēk[adj.] hī[p.] javāb[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] - mubārak[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , badhāī[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] , sadā saphal[adj.] rahnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] aur aurō̃ kō[postp.] bhī[p.] saphaltā[n.f.;sg.] svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] banānā[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] uṛnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

BapDada all card and x of one only x give[pres.pl.m.12hon3] - congratulations (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , greetings (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) , constantly successful remain[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] and others to too success form create[pres-part.m.pl.,o.] fly[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴⁶³In return for all the cards, BapDada gives just one response: Congratulations and greetings! ⁴⁶⁴May you constantly be successful and fly whilst making others embodiments of success.

³⁶⁶

चलो नहीं , उड़ो .

chalō nahī̃ , uṛō .

chalnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] nahī̃[neg] , uṛnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

continue[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] not , fly[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴⁶⁵Do not just walk, but fly. ⁴⁶⁶Achcha.

³⁶⁷

अच्छा जो दूर बैठे सुन रहे हैं उन्हों को भी बापदादा एक-एक देश को नाम सहित , हर एक सेवाकेन्द्र की विशेषता सहित सम्मुख वालों से भी पहले यादप्यार दे रहे हैं .

achchhā jō dūr baiṭhē sun rahē haĩ unhō̃ kō bhī bāpdādā ēk-ēk dēśh kō nām sahit , har ēk sēvākēndra kī|key viśhēṣhtā sahit sammukh vālō̃ sē bhī pahlē yādpyār dē rahē haĩ .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] jō[pn.;d.] dūr[adj.] baiṭhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|baiṭhnā[opt.sg.23] sunnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] vah[pn.pl.o.] kō[postp.] bhī[p.] bāpdādā ēk[adj.] dēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] nām[n.m.;sg.,d.] sahit , har ēk[x] sēvākēndra[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key viśhēṣhtā[n.f.;sg.] sahit sammukh vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.] bhī[p.] pahlā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|pahlē[adv.] yād-pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

achcha that distant (sit[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|sit[opt.sg.23]) listen[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] that to too BapDada one land to name including , each one centre (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) speciality including in front of you those who from too (x|firstly) love, remembrance give[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

⁴⁶⁷BapDada is giving special love and remembrance to those who are listening far away in each country, personally by name, and to each centre with their speciality. ⁴⁶⁸Even before He gives them to those who are sitting in front of Him, BapDada is doing this.

³⁶⁸

साधन अच्छा निकाला है और भी निकलते रहेंगे .

sādhan achchhā nikālā hai aur bhī nikaltē rahē̃gē .

sādhan[n.m.;sg.,d.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] nikālnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] aur bhī[p.] nikalnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā] .

facilities achcha x[pres-perf.sg.m.23] and too be extracted[fut.m.pl.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā] .

⁴⁶⁹A very good invention has been created. ⁴⁷⁰Many inventions are to be created.

³⁶⁹

आगे चलकर देखेंगे भी .

āgē chalkar dēkhē̃gē bhī .

āgē chalnā[abs.] dēkhnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] bhī[p.] .

previously continue[abs.] see[fut.m.pl.12hon3] too .

³⁷⁰

यह तो सेन्टर्स सुन रहे हैं , वह भी दिन आयेगा जो चारों ओर बाप का सन्देश सभी तरफ पहुंचेगा .

yah tō centres sun rahē haĩ , vah bhī din āyēgā jō chārō̃ ōr bāp kā sandēśh sabhī taraph pahuñchēgā .

yah[pn.sg.d.] tō centre sunnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] , vah[pn.sg.d.] bhī[p.] din[n.m.;sg.,d.] ānā[fut.m.sg.23] jō[pn.;d.] chārō̃ ōr[x] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] sandēśh[x] sab[adv.hī] taraph[n.m.;sg.,d.] pahuñchnā[fut.m.sg.23] .

this then centre listen[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] , that too day come[fut.m.sg.23] that everywhere father of message all direction reach[fut.m.sg.23] .

⁴⁷¹It is good. ⁴⁷²One day, you will also see all of this on a screen. ⁴⁷³All the centres are hearing this, and a day will also come when Baba’s message will reach everywhere.

³⁷¹

साइन्स भी सब आपके लिए ही इन्वेन्शन कर रही है .

science bhī sab āpkē liē hī invention kar rahī hai .

science bhī[p.] sab[adj.] āp[pn.pl.kē] lēnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|liē hī[p.] invention karnā[pres.sg.f.prog.23] .

science too all you[.kē] (take[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|for) only invention do[pres.sg.f.prog.23] .

⁴⁷⁴Science is creating all these inventions for you.

³⁷²

इसीलिए बापदादा साइन्स के साधन निकालने वाले बच्चों को भी स्नेह से मुबारक देते हैं .

isīliē bāpdādā science kē|K sādhan nikālnē vālē bachchō̃ kō bhī snēh sē mubārak dētē haĩ .

isīliē bāpdādā science kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sādhan[n.m.;sg.,d.] nikālnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] bhī[p.] snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] mubārak[n.f.;sg.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

x BapDada science (of|K) facilities x[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who child to too love from congratulations give[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁴⁷⁵Therefore, BapDada is congratulating with a lot of love the children who have created scientific inventions.

³⁷³

दिमाग तो चलाते हैं .

dimāg tō chalātē haĩ .

dimāg[n.m.;sg.,d.] tō chalānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

head then x[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁴⁷⁶At least they are using their heads!.

³⁷⁴

साइन्स वाले भी आयेंगे , आपकी अंचली लेंगे .

science vālē bhī āyēṅgē , āpkī añchalī lē̃gē .

science vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhī[p.] ānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , āp[pn.pl.kī] añchalī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] lēnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

science those who too come[fut.m.pl.12hon3] , you[.kī] drop take[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

³⁷⁵

फिर आपकी सेवा में भविष्य में आयेंगे .

phir āpkī sēvā mē̃ bhaviṣhya mē̃ āyēṅgē .

phir[adv.]|phirnā[root] āp[pn.pl.kī] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] bhaviṣhya[adj.] mē̃[postp.] ānā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

(then|turn[root]) you[.kī] service in future in come[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

⁴⁷⁷Scientists will also come to take support from you, and they will then come in the future to serve you.

³⁷⁶

अच्छा .

achchhā .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] .

achcha .

⁴⁷⁸Achcha.

³⁷⁷

बापदादा सभी सेवाकेन्द्रों में सेवा के लिए डायरेक्शन दे रहे हैं कि सितम्बर और अक्टूबर यह दो मास बड़े-बड़े प्रोग्राम करो .

bāpdādā sabhī sēvākēndrō̃ mē̃ sēvā kē liē direction dē rahē haĩ ki sitambar aur akṭūbar yah dō mās baṛē-baṛē programme karō .

bāpdādā sab[adv.hī] sēvākēndra[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] mē̃[postp.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kē liē[x] direction dēnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] ki[conj.] x aur x yah[pn.sg.d.] dēnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]|dō[adj.] mās[n.m.;sg.,d.]|māns[n.m.;sg.,d.] baṛā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] programme karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

BapDada all centre in service for direction give[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] that x and x this (give[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]|two) (month|x) very programme do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴⁷⁹BapDada is giving a direction for service to all the service centres. ⁴⁸⁰In the two months of September and October, have large programmes.

³⁷⁸

जितना भी आवाज़ फैला सकते हो , सभी कोनों में आवाज़ फैलाओ .

jitnā bhī āvāz phailā saktē hō , sabhī kōnō̃ mē̃ āvāz phailāō .

jitnā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhī[p.] āvāz[n.f.;sg.] phailānā[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] , sab[adv.hī] kōnā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] mē̃[postp.] āvāz[n.f.;sg.] phailānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

the more too noise spread[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] , all corner in noise spread[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴⁸¹Spread the sound everywhere as much and as loudly as you can.

³⁷⁹

कोई भी कोना रह नहीं जाये .

kōī bhī kōnā rah nahī̃ jāyē .

kōī bhī[x] kōnā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] rahnā[root] nahī̃[neg] jānā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] .

anyone corner remain[root] not go[past-part.m.pl.,o.] .

⁴⁸²No corner should be left out.

³⁸⁰

बड़े-बड़े प्रोग्राम्स में भी लक्ष्य रखो , ऐसी कोई विधि बनाओ जो सिर्फ सुनके नहीं जायें लेकिन बनने की शुभ इच्छा लेकर जायें .

baṛē-baṛē programmes mē̃ bhī lakṣhya rakhō , aisī kōī vidhi banāō jō sirph sunkē nahī̃ jāyē̃ lēkin bannē kī|key śhubh ichchhā lēkar jāyē̃ .

baṛā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] programme mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] lakṣhya[adj.] rakhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , aisā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] kōī[pn.;d.] vidhi[n.m.;sg.,d.] banānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] jō[pn.;d.] sirph[adj.] sunnā[abs.] nahī̃[neg] jānā[opt.pl.12hon3] lēkin bannā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key śhubh[adj.] ichchhā[n.f.;sg.] lēnā[abs.] jānā[opt.pl.12hon3] .

very programme in too aim keep[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , such some method create[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] that only listen[abs.] not go[opt.pl.12hon3] but become[inf.m.pl.,o.] (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) pure and positive desire take[abs.] go[opt.pl.12hon3] .

³⁸¹

कुछ अनुभव करके जायें .

kuchh anubhav karkē jāyē̃ .

kuchh anubhav[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[abs.] jānā[opt.pl.12hon3] .

anything experience do[abs.] go[opt.pl.12hon3] .

⁴⁸³Even in the large programmes, aim and adopt such a method that people will not go away just having heard you but will have experienced something and go away with a pure desire to become like that.

³⁸²

वर्तमान समय वायुमण्डल भी चारों ओर सहयोगी है इसलिए सफलता सहज प्राप्त होने का समय है .

vartamān samay vāyumaṇḍal bhī chārō̃ ōr sahyōgī hai isliē saphaltā sahaj prāpt hōnē kā samay hai .

vartamān[adj.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] vāyumaṇḍal[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] chārō̃ ōr[x] sahyōgī[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] isliē saphaltā[n.f.;sg.] sahaj[adj.] prāpt[adj.] hōnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

present time atmosphere too everywhere co-operative be[pres.sg.23] therefore success easy reached be[inf.m.pl.,o.] of time be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴⁸⁴According to the present time, the atmosphere everywhere is very cooperative and this is why it is now the time to achieve success easily.

³⁸³

खूब आवाज़ फैलाओ और साथ-साथ जो छोटे-छोटे स्थान हैं , जिसमें बड़े फंक्शन करने की हिम्मत नहीं है , वहाँ छोटे-छोटे ग्रुप्स का चाहे 10-12 हो लेकिन योग शिविर के प्रोग्राम रखो .

khūb āvāz phailāō aur sāth-sāth jō chhōṭē-chhōṭē sthān haĩ , jismē̃ baṛē function karnē kī|key himmat nahī̃ hai , vahā̃ chhōṭē-chhōṭē groups kā chāhē 10-12 hō lēkin yōg śhivir kē|K programme rakhō .

khūb[adj.] āvāz[n.f.;sg.] phailānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] aur sāth-sāth jō[pn.;d.] chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sthān[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , jō[pn.sg.mē̃] baṛā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] function karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key himmat[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , vahā̃ chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] group kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] 10-12 hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] lēkin yōg[n.m.;sg.,d.] śhivir[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K programme rakhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

a lot noise spread[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] and x that small place be[pres.pl.12hon3] , that[.mē̃] very x do[inf.m.pl.,o.] (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) courage not be[pres.sg.23] , there small group of (x[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|whether|x[opt.sg.23]) 10-12 (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) but yoga camp (of|K) programme keep[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴⁸⁵Spread the sound as much as you can. ⁴⁸⁶As well as this, the little places that don’t have the courage to have large programmes, should have groups of 10 to 12 and have yoga camps for them.

³⁸⁴

अगर स्थान नहीं है तो कोई साथ में स्थान ले सकते हो तो लो , अगर वह भी नहीं है तो एक दिन का भी शिविर रखो .

agar sthān nahī̃ hai tō kōī sāth mē̃ sthān lē saktē hō tō lō|low , agar vah bhī nahī̃ hai tō ēk din kā bhī śhivir rakhō .

agar sthān[n.m.;sg.,d.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] tō kōī[pn.;d.] sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] sthān[n.m.;sg.,d.] lēnā[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] tō lēnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]|low , agar vah[pn.sg.d.] bhī[p.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[pres.sg.23] tō ēk[adj.] din[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhī[p.] śhivir[n.m.;sg.,d.] rakhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

if place not be[pres.sg.23] then some with in place take[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] then (take[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2]|low) , if that too not be[pres.sg.23] then one day of too camp keep[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴⁸⁷If you don't have the space, you can hire a nearby hall. ⁴⁸⁸If even that is not possible, then have a yoga camp for just one day.

³⁸⁵

अगर छुट्टी का एक दिन भी रखते हो और उन्हों को अनुभव अच्छा होता है तो वह आपेही दूसरे सण्डे को भी आफर करेंगे .

agar chhuṭṭī kā ēk din bhī rakhtē hō aur unhō̃ kō anubhav achchhā hōtā hai tō vah āpēhī dūsrē Sunday kō bhī offer karē̃gē .

agar chhuṭṭī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] ēk[adj.] din[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] rakhnā[pres.pl.m.2] aur vah[pn.pl.o.] kō[postp.] anubhav[n.m.;sg.,d.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23] tō vah[pn.sg.d.] āpēhī dūsrā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] Sunday kō[postp.] bhī[p.] offer karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

if permission of one day too keep[pres.pl.m.2] and that to experience achcha be[pres.sg.m.23] then that automatically other Sunday to too offer do[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

⁴⁸⁹If you have a programme on a holiday day and they like it very much, they themselves will offer to come the following Sunday.

³⁸⁶

देखा जाता है योग शिविर स्टूडेन्ट बनाता है .

dēkhā jātā hai yōg śhivir student banātā hai .

dēkhnā[pres.sg.m.23.past-part+jānā]|dēkhnā[pres.sg.m.23.passive] yōg[n.m.;sg.,d.] śhivir[n.m.;sg.,d.] student banānā[pres.sg.m.23] .

(see[pres.sg.m.23.past-part+jānā]|see[pres.sg.m.23.passive]) yoga camp student create[pres.sg.m.23] .

⁴⁹⁰It has been seen that yoga camps help to create students.

³⁸⁷

कांफ्रेंस और स्नेह मिलन , छोटे-छोटे स्नेह मिलन भी समीप लाते हैं लेकिन बड़े प्रोग्राम प्रभावित करते हैं .

conference aur snēh milan , chhōṭē-chhōṭē snēh milan bhī samīp lātē haĩ lēkin baṛē programme prabhāvit kartē haĩ .

conference aur snēh milan[x] , chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] snēh milan[x] bhī[p.] samīp[adj.] lānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] lēkin baṛā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] programme prabhāvit[adj.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

conference and small gathering of love , small small gathering of love too close x[pres.pl.m.12hon3] but very programme x do[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁴⁹¹Conferences and loving gatherings even small loving gatherings - bring others close, whereas the large programmes impress people a great deal.

³⁸⁸

नाम बाला होता है .

nām bālā hōtā hai .

nām[n.m.;sg.,d.] bālā[x] hōnā[pres.sg.m.23] .

name x be[pres.sg.m.23] .

³⁸⁹

एडवरटाइज अच्छी हो जाती है .

advertise achchhī hō jātī hai .

advertise achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] .

advertise achcha be[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] .

⁴⁹²Your name is glorified through these and the publicity is very good.

³⁹⁰

तो दोनों ही जरूरी हैं लेकिन छोटे स्थान और छोटे सेन्टर्स या तो छोटे-छोटे स्नेह मिलन करो वा योग शिविर का छोटा सा प्रोग्राम रखो .

tō dōnō̃ hī jarūrī haĩ lēkin chhōṭē sthān aur chhōṭē centres yā tō chhōṭē-chhōṭē snēh milan karō vā yōg śhivir kā chhōṭā sā programme rakhō .

tō dōnō̃ hī[p.] zarūrī[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] lēkin chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sthān[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] centre yā tō chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] snēh milan[x] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] vā yōg[n.m.;sg.,d.] śhivir[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] sā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] programme rakhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

then x only essential be[pres.pl.12hon3] but small place and small centre or then small small gathering of love do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] or yoga camp of small x programme keep[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴⁹³Therefore, both are essential. ⁴⁹⁴The small places and small centres should have small loving gatherings or yoga camps.

³⁹¹

उसके साथ बापदादा हर ब्राह्मण की स्व-उन्नति के प्रति जहाँ-जहाँ जब सहज मास निकल सकता है , मौसम के अनुसार , प्रबन्ध के अनुसार एक मास स्व-उन्नति , सर्व खज़ानों को जमा करने के अभ्यास की भट्ठी हो .

uskā[pn.sg.kē] sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] bāpdādā harnā[root]|har|her brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key svaunnati[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] kē prati[x] jahā̃ jab sahaj[adj.] mās[n.m.;sg.,d.]|māns[n.m.;sg.,d.] nikalnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+saknā] , mausam[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K anusār , prabandh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K anusār ēk[adj.] mās[n.m.;sg.,d.]|māns[n.m.;sg.,d.] svaunnati[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] , sarv[adj.] khajānā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] jamā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|jamnā[past-part.m.sg.d.]|jamānā[root] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K abhyās[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key bhaṭṭhī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] .

⁴⁹⁵Together with this, for the progress of every Brahmin, in whichever month, it is easily possible, according to the weather and also the facilities, let there be a one month bhatti for selfprogress and to practise accumulating all the treasures.

³⁹²

एक मास स्व - उन्नति के लिए भी निकालना जरूरी है .

ēk mās sva - unnati kē liē bhī nikālnā jarūrī hai .

ēk[adj.] mās[n.m.;sg.,d.]|māns[n.m.;sg.,d.] sva - unnati[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] kē liē[x] bhī[p.] nikālnā[inf.m.sg.d.] zarūrī[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

one (month|x) x - self-progress for too x[inf.m.sg.d.] essential be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴⁹⁶It is essential to take out a month for selfprogress.

³⁹³

उसमें कुछ नवीनता निकालो .

usmē̃ kuchh navīntā nikālō .

vah[pn.sg.mē̃] kuchh navīntā[n.f.;sg.] nikālnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

that[.mē̃] anything newness x[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴⁹⁷Create some newness in this.

³⁹⁴

जैसे अभी भट्ठियाँ होती रही हैं , वह भी अच्छी हैं लेकिन कुछ उसमें नवीनता एड करो .

jaisē abhī bhaṭṭhiyā̃ hōtī rahī haĩ , vah bhī achchhī haĩ lēkin kuchh usmē̃ navīntā add karō .

jaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] ab[adv.hī] x hōnā[pres-perf.pl.f.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā] , vah[pn.sg.d.] bhī[p.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] lēkin kuchh vah[pn.sg.mē̃] navīntā[n.f.;sg.] add karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

like now x be[pres-perf.pl.f.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā] , that too achcha be[pres.pl.12hon3] but anything that[.mē̃] newness add do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

³⁹⁵

कुछ समय अन्तर्मुखता का मौन , मन का मौन भी हो .

kuchh samay antarmukhtā kā maun , man kā maun bhī hō .

kuchh samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] antarmukhtā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] maun[n.m.;sg.,d.] , man[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] maun[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] .

anything time x of silence , mind of silence too (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) .

⁴⁹⁸Just as there have been bhattis now, and they have also been good, now let there be some addition by putting some newness into them.

³⁹⁶

मुख का मौन तो दुनिया भी रखती है लेकिन यहाँ व्यर्थ संकल्प से मन का मौन होना चाहिए .

mukh kā maun tō duniyā bhī rakhtī hai lēkin yahā̃ vyarth saṅkalp sē man kā maun hōnā chāhiē .

mukh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] maun[n.m.;sg.,d.] tō duniyā[n.f.;sg.] bhī[p.] rakhnā[pres.sg.f.23] lēkin yahā̃ vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] man[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] maun[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[imp.pl.2hon.inf+cāhnā]|hōnā[.oblig3] .

mouth of silence then world too keep[pres.sg.f.23] but here wasteful thought from mind of silence (be[imp.pl.2hon.inf+cāhnā]|be[.oblig3]) .

³⁹⁷

जैसे ट्रैफिक कन्ट्रोल करते हो तो व्यर्थ की ट्रैफिक को कन्ट्रोल करते हो वैसे बीचबी च में एक दिन मन के व्यर्थ का ट्रैफिक कन्ट्रोल करो .

jaisē traffic control kartē hō tō vyarth kī|key traffic kō control kartē hō vaisē bīcabī cha mē̃ ēk din man kē|K vyarth kā traffic control karō .

jaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] traffic control[x] karnā[pres.pl.m.2] tō vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key traffic kō[postp.] control karnā[pres.pl.m.2] vaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] x cha mē̃[postp.] ēk[adj.] din[n.m.;sg.,d.] man[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K vyarth[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] traffic control[x] karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

like traffic control do[pres.pl.m.2] then wasteful (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) traffic to control do[pres.pl.m.2] x x x in one day mind (of|K) wasteful of traffic control do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

³⁹⁸

ज्ञान के मनन के साथ शुभ भावना , शुभ कामना के संकल्प , सकाश देने का अभ्यास , यह मन के मौन का या ट्रैफिक कन्ट्रोल का बीच-बीच में दिन मुकरर करो .

gyān kē|K manan kē sāth śhubh bhāvnā , śhubh kāmnā kē|K saṅkalp , sakāśh dēnē kā abhyās , yah man kē|K maun kā yā traffic control kā bīch-bīch mē̃ din mukarar karō .

gyān[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K manan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kē sāth[x] śhubh bhāvnā[x] , śhubh kāmnā[x] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] , sakāśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] abhyās[n.m.;sg.,d.] , yah[pn.sg.d.] man[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K maun[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] yā traffic control[x] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bīch-bīch mē̃[x] din[n.m.;sg.,d.] mukarar karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

knowledge (of|K) churning with pure feeling , good wishes (of|K) thought , sakaash give[inf.m.pl.,o.] of practice , this mind (of|K) silence of or traffic control of x day x do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

³⁹⁹

अगर किसको छुट्टी नहीं भी मिलती हो , एक दिन सप्ताह में तो छुट्टी मिलती है , उसी प्रमाण अपने - अपने स्थान के प्रोग्राम फिक्स करो .

agar kiskō chhuṭṭī nahī̃ bhī miltī hō , ēk din saptāh mē̃ tō chhuṭṭī miltī hai , usī pramāṇ apnē - apnē sthān kē|K programme fix karō .

agar kaun[pn.sg.kō] chhuṭṭī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] nahī̃[neg] bhī[p.] milnā[pres.pl.f.2] , ēk[adj.] din[n.m.;sg.,d.] saptāh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] tō chhuṭṭī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] milnā[pres.sg.f.23] , vah[pn.sg.hī] pramāṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.]|pramāṇ apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] - apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sthān[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K programme fix karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

if who[.kō] permission not too receive[pres.pl.f.2] , one day week in then permission receive[pres.sg.f.23] , that[.hī] (under) one’s own - one’s own place (of|K) programme fix do[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴⁹⁹For some time, let there be the silence of introversion and the silence of the mind.

⁴⁰⁰

लेकिन एक मास विशेष एकान्तवासी और खज़ानों के एकानामी का प्रोग्राम अवश्य रखो .

lēkin ēk mās viśhēṣh ēkāntvāsī aur khazānō̃ kē|K economy kā programme avaśhya rakhō .

lēkin ēk[adj.] mās[n.m.;sg.,d.]|māns[n.m.;sg.,d.] viśhēṣh[adj.] ēkāntvāsī[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur khajānā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K economy kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] programme avaśhya rakhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

but one (month|x) special one who is in solitude and treasure (of|K) economical of programme x keep[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴⁰¹

एकनामी और एकानामी .

ēknāmī aur economy .

x and economical .

⁵⁰⁰People of the world also keep silence by not speaking, but here, you should have silence of the mind by being free from waste thoughts.

⁴⁰²

बाकी बापदादा अपने नियम प्रमाण नवम्बर से आरम्भ करेंगे .

bākī bāpdādā apnē niyam pramāṇ November sē ārambh karē̃gē .

bākī|bākī bāpdādā apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] niyam[n.m.;sg.,d.] pramāṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.]|pramāṇ November sē[postp.] ārambh[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

(others|but) BapDada one’s own law (under) November from x do[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

⁴⁰³

देखा गया कि रथ के दृढ़ संकल्प , हिम्मत और सम्भाल से यह वर्ष निर्विघ्न समाप्त हुआ है और हो जायेगा .

dēkhā gayā ki rath kē|K dr̥iṛh saṅkalp , himmat aur sambhāl sē yah varṣh nirvighna samāpt huā hai aur hō jāyēgā .

dēkhnā[past-part.m.sg.d..past-part+jānā]|dēkhnā[past-part.m.sg.d..passive] ki[conj.] rath[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K dr̥iṛh[adj.] saṅkalp[n.m.;sg.,d.] , himmat[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur sambhālnā[root]|sambhāl[n.f.;sg.] sē[postp.] yah[pn.sg.d.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] nirvighna[adj.] samāpt[adj.] hōnā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] aur hōnā[fut.m.sg.23.root+jānā] .

(see[past-part.m.sg.d..past-part+jānā]|see[past-part.m.sg.d..passive]) that chariot (of|K) determined thought , courage and (be careful[root]|x) from this year free from obstacles finished be[pres-perf.sg.m.23] and be[fut.m.sg.23.root+jānā] .

⁵⁰¹Just as when you do traffic control, you control any wasteful traffic, in the same way, every now and again, control the wasteful traffic of your mind for one day.

⁴⁰⁴

तो अभी भी बच्ची का उमंग है , जब रथ तैयार है तो रथवान को आने में क्या है .

tō abhī bhī bachchī kā umaṅg hai , jab rath taiyār hai tō rathavān kō ānē mē̃ kyā hai .

tō ab[adv.hī] bhī[p.] bachchī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] umaṅg[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , jab rath[n.m.;sg.,d.] taiyār[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] tō x kō[postp.] ānā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.]|ānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] mē̃[postp.] kyā hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

then now too girl of zeal be[pres.sg.23] , when chariot x be[pres.sg.23] then x to (x|come[inf.m.pl.,o.]) in what be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴⁰⁵

हाँ बीच-बीच में रेस्ट का देखना .

hā̃ bīch-bīch mē̃ rest kā dēkhnā .

hā̃ bīch-bīch mē̃[x] rest kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] dēkhnā[inf.m.sg.d.] .

yes x x of see[inf.m.sg.d.] .

⁵⁰²Have a day of silence of the mind in which you only have pure thoughts, thoughts of knowledge, thoughts of good wishes and pure feelings.

⁴⁰⁶

रथ को रेस्ट भी देना , ऐसा नहीं कि काम में ज्यादा लगा दो .

rath kō rest bhī dēnā , aisā nahī̃ ki kām mē̃ jyādā lagā dō .

rath[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] rest bhī[p.] dēnā[inf.m.sg.d.] , aisā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] ki[conj.] kām[n.m.;sg.,d.]|kām[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] jyādā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] lagānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+dēnā] .

chariot to x too give[inf.m.sg.d.] , such not that (lust|task) in more attach[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.root+dēnā] .

⁴⁰⁷

अच्छा है रेस्ट के टाइम रेस्ट , सेवा के समय सेवा .

achchhā hai rest kē|K time rest , sēvā kē|K samay sēvā .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] rest kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K time rest , sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K samay[n.m.;sg.,d.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] .

achcha be[pres.sg.23] x (of|K) time x , service (of|K) time service .

⁵⁰³Also practise giving a current of light and might. ⁵⁰⁴Every now and again, fix a day for this type of traffic control, that is, for the silence of the mind.

⁴⁰⁸

अमृतवेले जो मुख्य प्लैनिंग बुद्धि हैं उन्हों को बापदादा कार्य के निमित्त बनाता है , उन्हों को नई विधियां सेवा की टच होंगी , सिर्फ अपनी बुद्धि को बाप के हवाले करके बैठो .

amr̥itvēlē jō mukhya planning buddhi haĩ unhō̃ kō bāpdādā kārya kē nimitt banātā hai , unhō̃ kō naī vidhiyā̃ sēvā kī|key touch hōṅgī , sirph apnī buddhi kō bāp kē|K havālē karkē baiṭhō .

amr̥itvēlā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] jō[pn.;d.] mukhya[adj.] planning buddhi[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] vah[pn.pl.o.] kō[postp.] bāpdādā kārya[n.m.;sg.,d.] kē nimitt[x] banānā[pres.sg.m.23] , vah[pn.pl.o.] kō[postp.] nayā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] vidhi[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key touch hōnā[fut.f.pl.12hon3] , sirph[adj.] apnā[pn.ā=>ī;f.] buddhi[n.f.;sg.] kō[postp.] bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K havālē karnā[abs.] baiṭhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

amrit vela that main planning intellect be[pres.pl.12hon3] that to BapDada task x create[pres.sg.m.23] , that to new method service (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) touch be[fut.f.pl.12hon3] , only one’s own intellect to father (of|K) giving do[abs.] sit[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴⁰⁹

बुद्धिवानों की बुद्धि आपकी बुद्धि को टच करेंगे .

buddhivānō̃ kī|key buddhi āpkī buddhi kō touch karē̃gē .

buddhivān[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key buddhi[n.f.;sg.] āp[pn.pl.kī] buddhi[n.f.;sg.] kō[postp.] touch karnā[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

wise (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) intellect you[.kī] intellect to touch do[fut.m.pl.12hon3] .

⁵⁰⁵If some of you are not able to get leave, then you have at least a day's holiday every week, and so fix a programme at your own place for this. ⁵⁰⁶However, for one month, have a special programme of remaining in solitude and being economical with your treasures. ⁵⁰⁷Be economical and belong to One.

⁴¹⁰

यह प्लैनिंग बुद्धि वालों को वरदान मिलना ही है .

yah planning buddhi vālō̃ kō vardān milnā hī hai .

yah[pn.sg.d.] planning buddhi[n.f.;sg.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] vardān[n.m.;sg.,d.] milnā[inf.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

this planning intellect those who to blessing receive[inf.m.sg.d.] only be[pres.sg.23] .

⁵⁰⁸BapDada will begin the season, according to His discipline, in November.

⁴¹¹

निमित्त बनो .

nimitt banō .

nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

instrument become[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴¹²

ठीक है ना पाण्डव .

ṭhīk hai nā pāṇḍav .

ṭhīk[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā pāṇḍav[n.m.;sg.,d.] .

OK be[pres.sg.23] ∅ Pandava .

⁴¹³

देखो सब प्लैनिंग बुद्धि वाले बैठे हैं , टीचर्स भी , विदेशी भी , भारत वाले भी तो क्या हो जायेगा  ?

dēkhō sab planning buddhi vālē baiṭhē haĩ , teachers bhī , vidēśhī bhī , bhārat vālē bhī tō kyā hō jāyēgā  ?

dēkhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] sab[adj.] planning buddhi[n.f.;sg.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] baiṭhnā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] , teacher bhī[p.] , vidēśhī[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] , bhārat[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bhī[p.] tō kyā hōnā[fut.m.sg.23.root+jānā]  ?

see[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] all planning intellect those who sit[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] , teacher too , foreigner too , Bharat those who too then what be[fut.m.sg.23.root+jānā]  ?

⁵⁰⁹It has been seen that with the determined thoughts and courage and care of the chariot, this year is finishing completely free from all obstacles. ⁵¹⁰It will continue to be so.

⁴¹⁴

बहुत-बहुत अच्छा होगा .

bahut-bahut achchhā hōgā .

bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] .

very achcha be[fut.m.sg.23] .

⁵¹¹The child has enthusiasm even now.

⁴¹⁵

बाकी गर्मी और बरसात में छोटे-छोटे स्नेह मिलन कर सकते हो .

bākī garmī aur barsāt mē̃ chhōṭē-chhōṭē snēh milan kar saktē hō .

bākī|bākī garmī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] aur barsāt[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] snēh milan[x] karnā[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] .

(others|but) heat and rain in small small gathering of love do[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] .

⁵¹²Therefore, if the chariot is ready, what does it matter for the Charioteer to come here?

⁴¹⁶

शान्तिवन में भी , बापदादा ने पहले भी कहा था कि कईयों के मित्र सम्बन्धी , समीप वाले योग शिविर करने चाहते हैं तो उन्हों को थोड़ा सा हालों में कम संख्या करके और जो हर हाल में कमरे छोटे-छोटे बनाये हैं , जहाँ अभी टीचर्स रहती हैं वहाँ अगर कोई ऐसे वी . आई . पी . हैं तो उन कमरों में भी अलग में रख सकते हैं और बहुत बड़ा हाल है तो डबल कनात की पार्टीशन भी कर सकते हैं क्योंकि अभी सीजन तक तो बना नहीं सकते हैं लेकिन पीछे कुछ प्रबन्ध कर भी सकते हैं .

śhāntivan mē̃ bhī , bāpdādā nē pahlē bhī kahā thā ki kaīyō̃ kē|K mitr sambandhī , samīp vālē yōg śhivir karnē chāhtē haĩ tō unhō̃ kō thōṛā sā hālō̃ mē̃ kam|cum saṅkhyā karkē aur jō har|her hall|hāl mē̃ kamrē chhōṭē-chhōṭē banāyē haĩ , jahā̃ abhī teachers rahtī haĩ vahā̃ agar kōī aisē we|V . āī|eye|I . P|pī . haĩ tō un kamrō̃ mē̃ bhī alag mē̃ rakh saktē haĩ aur bahut baṛā hall|hāl hai tō double kanāt kī|key partition bhī kar saktē haĩ kyōṅki abhī season tak tō banā nahī̃ saktē haĩ lēkin pīchhē kuchh prabandh kar bhī saktē haĩ .

śhāntivan[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] , bāpdādā nē[postp.] pahlā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|pahlē[adv.] bhī[p.] kahnā[past-perf.m.sg.] ki[conj.] kaī[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K mitr[n.m.;sg.,d.] sambandhī[n.m.;sg.,d.] , samīp[adj.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] yōg[n.m.;sg.,d.] śhivir[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] chāhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] tō vah[pn.pl.o.] kō[postp.] thōṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] sā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] x mē̃[postp.] kam[adj.]|cum saṅkhyā[n.f.;sg.] karnā[abs.] aur jō[pn.;d.] harnā[root]|har|her hall|hāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] kamrā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] banānā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] , jahā̃ ab[adv.hī] teacher rahnā[pres.pl.f.12hon3] vahā̃ agar kōī[pn.;d.] aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] we|V . ānā[past-part.f.]|eye|I . P|pīnā[root]|pīnā[past-part.f.] . hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] tō vah[pn.pl.o.] kamrā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] alag[adj.] mē̃[postp.] rakhnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] aur bahut baṛā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hall|hāl[n.m.;sg.,d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] tō double x kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key partition bhī[p.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] kyōṅki ab[adv.hī] season tak tō banānā[root]|bannā[past-part.m.sg.d.] nahī̃[neg] saknā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] lēkin pīchhē kuchh prabandh[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[root] bhī[p.] saknā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

Shantivan in too , BapDada ∅ (x|firstly) too say[past-perf.m.sg.] that some (of|K) friend relative , close those who yoga camp do[inf.m.pl.,o.] x[pres.pl.m.12hon3] then that to short x x in (less|x) x do[abs.] and that (x[root]|x) (hall|x) in x small create[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] , where there now teacher remain[pres.pl.f.12hon3] there if some such (x) . (come[past-part.f.]|eye|x) . (P.|drink[root]|drink[past-part.f.]) . be[pres.pl.12hon3] then that x in too separate in keep[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] and very very (hall|x) be[pres.sg.23] then double x (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) partition too do[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] because now season until then (create[root]|become[past-part.m.sg.d.]) not can[pres.pl.m.12hon3] but x anything arrangement do[root] too can[pres.pl.m.12hon3] .

⁴¹⁷

और जो यहाँ अलग में एक बहनों का , एक भाईयों का भवन बनाया है , वहाँ भी अगर ब्राह्मण आत्मायें अपने को सेट कर सकें , तो विशेष वी . आई . पी . को इस वर्ष में सेट कर सकते हो .

aur jō yahā̃ alag mē̃ ēk bahanō̃ kā , ēk bhāīyō̃ kā bhavan banāyā hai , vahā̃ bhī agar brāhmaṇ ātmāyē̃ apnē kō set kar sakē̃ , tō viśhēṣh we|V . āī|eye|I . P|pī . kō is varṣh mē̃ set kar saktē hō .

aur jō[pn.;d.] yahā̃ alag[adj.] mē̃[postp.] ēk[adj.] bahan ou bahin[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] , ēk[adj.] bhāī[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] bhavan[n.m.;sg.,d.] banānā[pres-perf.sg.m.23] , vahā̃ bhī[p.] agar brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] ātmā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kō[postp.] set karnā[opt.pl.12hon3.root+saknā] , tō viśhēṣh[adj.] we|V . ānā[past-part.f.]|eye|I . P|pīnā[root]|pīnā[past-part.f.] . kō[postp.] yah[pn.sg.o.] varṣh[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] set karnā[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] .

and that here separate in one x of , one brother of Bhavan create[pres-perf.sg.m.23] , there too if Brahmin soul one’s own to set do[opt.pl.12hon3.root+saknā] , then special (x) . (come[past-part.f.]|eye|x) . (P.|drink[root]|drink[past-part.f.]) . to this year in set do[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] .

⁴¹⁸

ऐसा कोई वी . आई . पी . स्पेशल है तो .

aisā kōī we|V . āī|eye|I . P|pī . special hai tō .

such some (x) . (come[past-part.f.]|eye|x) . (P.|drink[root]|drink[past-part.f.]) . special be[pres.sg.23] then .

⁴¹⁹

बाकी ब्राह्मण तो अपने को एडजेस्ट भी कर सकते हैं और योग शिविर के ग्रुप तो साथी टीचर्स ही ले आती हैं .

bākī brāhmaṇ tō apnē kō adjust bhī kar saktē haĩ aur yōg śhivir kē|K group tō sāthī teachers hī lē ātī haĩ .

bākī|bākī brāhmaṇ[n.m.;sg.,d.] tō apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] kō[postp.] adjust bhī[p.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] aur yōg[n.m.;sg.,d.] śhivir[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K group tō sāthī[n.m.;sg.,d.] teacher hī[p.] lēnā[pres.pl.f.12hon3.root+ānā] .

(others|but) Brahmin then one’s own to x too do[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] and yoga camp (of|K) group then companion teacher only take[pres.pl.f.12hon3.root+ānā] .

⁵¹³Yes, a rest has to be given in between.

⁴²⁰

बाकी दूसरी सीजन में तो वी . आई . पी . के तैयार हो ही जायेंगे .

bākī dūsrī season mē̃ tō we|V . āī|eye|I . P|pī . kē|K taiyār hō hī jāyēṅgē .

⁵¹⁴Give the chariot a rest. ⁵¹⁵It should not be that you engage the chariot in a lot of work.

⁴²¹

जो ज़ोन अपने ज़ोन का रिफ्रेशर कोर्स शान्तिवन में करना चाहते हैं , उसको शान्तिवन का चांस मिल सकता है .

jō zone apnē zone kā riphrēśar course śhāntivan mē̃ karnā chāhtē haĩ , uskō śhāntivan kā chance mil saktā hai .

jō[pn.;d.] zone apnā[pn.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] zone kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] x course śhāntivan[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.inf+cāhnā] , vah[pn.sg.kō] śhāntivan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] chance milnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+saknā] .

that zone one’s own zone of x course Shantivan in do[pres.pl.m.12hon3.inf+cāhnā] , that[.kō] Shantivan of chance receive[pres.sg.m.23.root+saknā] .

⁵¹⁶It is good to rest at the time of rest and serve at the time when you have to do service.

⁴²²

यहाँ-वहाँ स्थान ढूंढने के बजाए चाहे संख्या कम भी हो फिर भी जो सुख-साधन यहाँ है वह बाहर नहीं मिल सकता .

yahā̃-vahā̃ sthān ḍhūṇḍhnē kē bajāē chāhē saṅkhyā kam|cum bhī hō phir bhī jō sukh-sādhan yahā̃ hai vah bāhar nahī̃ mil saktā .

yahā̃-vahā̃ sthān[n.m.;sg.,d.] ḍhūṇḍhnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] kē bajāē[x] chāhnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|chāhē|chāhnā[opt.sg.23] saṅkhyā[n.f.;sg.] kam[adj.]|cum bhī[p.] hōnā[root]|hōnā[pres.pl.2] phir bhī[x] jō[pn.;d.] x yahā̃ hōnā[pres.sg.23] vah[pn.sg.d.] bāhar nahī̃[neg] milnā[root] saknā[pres-part.m.sg.d.] .

everywhere place discover[inf.m.pl.,o.] instead of (x[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|whether|x[opt.sg.23]) x (less|x) too (be[root]|be[pres.pl.2]) nevertheless that x here be[pres.sg.23] that outside not receive[root] can[pres-part.m.sg.d.] .

⁵¹⁷At amrit vela, BapDada makes the main ones with a planning intellect, instruments for a particular task. ⁵¹⁸They will be touched by new methods of service.

⁴²³

तो ज़ोन वालों को आफर है .

tō zone vālō̃ kō offer hai .

tō zone vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] offer hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

then zone those who to offer be[pres.sg.23] .

⁵¹⁹Simply sit and give your intellect to Baba.

⁴²⁴

अपना ग्रुप ले आवे और रिफ्रेश कर जाये क्योंकि यहाँ फिर भी दादियां तो मिलेंगी .

apnā group lē āvē aur refresh kar jāyē kyōṅki yahā̃ phir bhī dādiyā̃ tō milē̃gī .

apnā[pn.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.]|apnānā[root] group lēnā[opt.sg.23.root+ānā] aur refresh karnā[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] kyōṅki yahā̃ phir bhī[x] dādī[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] tō milnā[fut.f.pl.12hon3] .

(one’s own|adopt[root]) group take[opt.sg.23.root+ānā] and refresh do[past-part.m.pl.,o..root+jānā] because here nevertheless Dadi then receive[fut.f.pl.12hon3] .

⁵²⁰Baba, the Intellect of the Wise, will touch your intellect. ⁵²¹This is the blessing that those with a planning intellect receive.

⁴²⁵

वहाँ तो दादियाँ जावें नहीं जावें , यहाँ यह चांस मिल सकता है .

vahā̃ tō dādiyā̃ jāvē̃ nahī̃ jāvē̃ , yahā̃ yah chance mil saktā hai .

vahā̃ tō dādī[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] jānā[opt.pl.12hon3] nahī̃[neg] jānā[opt.pl.12hon3] , yahā̃ yah[pn.sg.d.] chance milnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+saknā] .

there then Dadi go[opt.pl.12hon3] not go[opt.pl.12hon3] , here this chance receive[pres.sg.m.23.root+saknā] .

⁵²²Simply become an instrument. ⁵²³Pandavs, is this OK?

⁴²⁶

और जो ग्रुप आफर करे , जैसे यूथ हैं या प्रवृत्ति वाले हैं , अगर 4-6 ज़ोन मिलके ग्रुप बना सकें तो बना सकते हैं क्योंकि ऊपर तो वर्ग की सेवा होगी लेकिन नीचे छोटे-छोटे ग्रुप के भी ऐसे प्रोग्राम कर सकते हो .

aur jō group offer karē , jaisē youth haĩ yā pravr̥itti vālē haĩ , agar 4-6 zone milkē group banā sakē̃ tō banā saktē haĩ kyōṅki ūpar tō varg kī|key sēvā hōgī lēkin nīchē chhōṭē-chhōṭē group kē|K bhī aisē programme kar saktē hō .

aur jō[pn.;d.] group offer karnā[opt.sg.23] , jaisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] youth hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] yā pravr̥itti[n.f.;sg.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , agar 4-6 zone milnā[abs.] group banānā[opt.pl.12hon3.root+saknā] tō banānā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] kyōṅki ūpar tō varg[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key sēvā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[fut.f.sg.23] lēkin nīchē chhōṭā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] group kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K bhī[p.] aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] programme karnā[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] .

and that group offer do[opt.sg.23] , like youth be[pres.pl.12hon3] or famille those who be[pres.pl.12hon3] , if 4-6 zone receive[abs.] group create[opt.pl.12hon3.root+saknā] then create[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] because over then profession (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) service be[fut.f.sg.23] but down small group (of|K) too such programme do[pres.pl.m.2.root+saknā] .

⁵²⁴Look how all of those with a planning intellect are sitting here; teachers, foreigners and Bharatwasis. ⁵²⁵So what's going to happen? ⁵²⁶Everything will be very good. ⁵²⁷You can have small loving gatherings in the hotweather and monsoon season.

⁴²⁷

शान्तिवन को बिजी रखो .

śhāntivan kō busy rakhō .

śhāntivan[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] busy rakhnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

Shantivan to busy keep[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁴²⁸

जो चांस लेना चाहे वह ले सकते हैं .

jō chance lēnā chāhē vah lē saktē haĩ .

jō[pn.;d.] chance lēnā[opt.sg.23.inf+cāhnā] vah[pn.sg.d.] lēnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] .

that chance take[opt.sg.23.inf+cāhnā] that take[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] .

⁴²⁹

मित्र-सम्बन्धियों की सेवा दिल से कर सकते हैं .

mitr-sambandhiyō̃ kī|key sēvā dil sē kar saktē haĩ .

mitr-sambandhī[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key sēvā[n.f.;sg.] dil[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] .

friends and relatives (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) service heart from do[pres.pl.m.12hon3.root+saknā] .

⁵²⁸BapDada told you earlier also, that many people’s friends and relatives, who have come close, want to have yoga camps here, in Shantivan.

⁴³⁰

अच्छा .

achchhā .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] .

achcha .

⁴³¹

चारों ओर के परमात्म पालना , पढ़ाई और श्रीमत के भाग्य के अधिकारी विशेष आत्माओं को , सदा सोचना और स्वरूप बनना दोनों समान करने वाले बाप समान आत्माओं को , सदा परमात्म विल पावर द्वारा स्वयं में और सेवा में सहज सफलता प्राप्त करने वाले निमित्त सेवाधारी बच्चों को , सदा बाप को कम्बाइन्ड रूप में अनुभव करने वाले , सदा साथ निभाने वाले साथी बच्चों को बापदादा का यादप्यार और नमस्ते .

chārō̃ ōr kē|K paramātma pālnā , paṛhāī aur śhrīmat kē|K bhāgya kē|K adhikārī viśhēṣh ātmāō̃ kō , sadā sōchnā aur svarūp bannā dōnō̃ samān karnē vālē bāp samān ātmāō̃ kō , sadā paramātma will power dvārā svayã mē̃ aur sēvā mē̃ sahaj saphaltā prāpt karnē vālē nimitt sēvādhārī bachchō̃ kō , sadā bāp kō combined rūp mē̃ anubhav karnē vālē , sadā sāth nibhānē vālē sāthī bachchō̃ kō bāpdādā kā yādpyār aur namastē .

chārō̃ ōr[x] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K paramātmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] pālnā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.]|pālnā[inf.m.sg.d.] , paṛhāī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.]|paṛhānā[past-part.f.] aur śhrīmat[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K bhāgya[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K adhikārī[n.m.;sg.,d.] viśhēṣh[adj.] ātmā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] , sadā sōchnā[inf.m.sg.d.] aur svarūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[inf.m.sg.d.] dōnō̃ samān[adj.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] bāp samān[x] ātmā[n.f.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] , sadā paramātmā[n.m.;sg.,d.] will power dvārā svayã mē̃[postp.] aur sēvā[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] sahaj[adj.] saphaltā[n.f.;sg.] prāpt[adj.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] sēvādhārī[n.m.;sg.,d.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] , sadā bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] combined rūp[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] anubhav[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] , sadā sāth[n.m.;sg.,d.] nibhānā[inf.m.pl.,o.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] sāthī[n.m.;sg.,d.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] bāpdādā kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] yād-pyār[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur namastē .

everywhere (of|K) Supreme Soul (x|sustenance[inf.m.sg.d.]) , (study|teach[past-part.f.]) and shrimat (of|K) x (of|K) (one) who has a right special soul to , constantly think[inf.m.sg.d.] and form become[inf.m.sg.d.] x equal do[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who equal to the Father soul to , constantly Supreme Soul will power through x in and service in easy success reached do[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who instrument server child to , constantly father to combined Rup in experience do[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who , constantly with fulfil[inf.m.pl.,o.] those who companion child to BapDada of love, remembrance and x .

⁴³²

अच्छा

achchhā

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.]

achcha

⁴³³

सभी ठीक रहे हुए हैं , कोई तकलीफ हुई है  ?

sabhī ṭhīk rahē huē haĩ , kōī taklīph huī hai  ?

sab[adv.hī] ṭhīk[adj.] rahnā[opt.sg.23]|rahnā[past-part.m.pl.,o.] hōnā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] , kōī[pn.;d.] taklīph[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres-perf.sg.f.23]  ?

all OK (remain[opt.sg.23]|remain[past-part.m.pl.,o.]) be[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3] , some difficulty be[pres-perf.sg.f.23]  ?

⁵²⁹Let there be a smaller number of people in each hall.

⁴³⁴

तकलीफ नहीं हुई ना  ?

taklīph nahī̃ huī nā  ?

taklīph[n.f.;sg.] nahī̃[neg] hōnā[past-part.f.] nā  ?

difficulty not be[past-part.f.] ∅  ?

⁴³⁵

खुश हैं  ?

khuśh haĩ  ?

khuśh[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3]  ?

happy be[pres.pl.12hon3]  ?

⁴³⁶

बच्चे खुश हैं  ?

bachchē khuśh haĩ  ?

bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] khuśh[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3]  ?

child happy be[pres.pl.12hon3]  ?

⁴³⁷

बहुत खुश हैं , नाच रहे हैं बच्चे .

bahut khuśh haĩ , nāch rahē haĩ bachchē .

bahut khuśh[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , nāchnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] .

very happy be[pres.pl.12hon3] , dance[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] child .

⁵³⁰If any VIPs come, they can be accommodated separately in those small rooms next to each hall where the teachers stay.

⁴³⁸

कुमारियां खुश हैं  ?

kumāriyā̃ khuśh haĩ  ?

kumārī[x] khuśh[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3]  ?

kumari happy be[pres.pl.12hon3]  ?

⁴³⁹

कुमारियां भी मौज में हैं .

kumāriyā̃ bhī mauj mē̃ haĩ .

kumārī[x] bhī[p.] mauj[n.f.;sg.] mē̃[postp.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

kumari too pleasure in be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

⁴⁴⁰

टीचर्स सबसे खुश हैं और पाण्डव खुशी में उड़ रहे हैं , बहुत अच्छा .

teachers sabsē khuśh haĩ aur pāṇḍav khuśhī mē̃ uṛ rahē haĩ , bahut achchhā .

teacher sabsē khuśh[adj.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] aur pāṇḍav[n.m.;sg.,d.] khuśhī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] mē̃[postp.] uṛnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] , bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] .

teacher the most happy be[pres.pl.12hon3] and Pandava happiness in fly[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] , very achcha .

⁵³¹The hall is very large, and so you can have a double partition, because you can't make anything now during this season. ⁵³²Perhaps you can make other arrangements later.

⁴⁴¹

दादियों से  : बच्चे कहते हैं जी बाबा , तो बाप भी कहते हैं जी बच्चे .

dādiyō̃ sē  : bachchē kahtē haĩ jī bābā , tō bāp bhī kahtē haĩ jī bachchē .

dādī[n.f.ī=>iyō̃;pl.o.] sē[postp.]  : bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] jīnā[root]|jī[x]|jīnā[past-part.f.] bābā , tō bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] kahnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] jīnā[root]|jī[x]|jīnā[past-part.f.] bachchā[n.m.ā=>ē;sg.o.,m.pl.d.] .

Dadi from  : child say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] (live[root]|ji|live[past-part.f.]) Baba , then father too say[pres.pl.m.12hon3] (live[root]|ji|live[past-part.f.]) child .

⁴⁴²

बाप और बच्चों का यही तो स्नेह का धागा है .

bāp aur bachchō̃ kā yahī tō snēh kā dhāgā hai .

bāp[n.m.;sg.,d.] aur bachchā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] yahī[pn.;d.] tō snēh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] dhāgā[n.m.ā=>ā;sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

father and child of this then love of thread be[pres.sg.23] .

⁵³³The smaller buildings that have been built for sisters and brothers, can accommodate any special VIPs, if Brahmin souls are able to put themselves elsewhere.

⁴⁴³

जगदीश भाई से - तबियत अच्छी है .

Jagdīśh bhāī sē - tabiyat achchhī hai .

Jagdīśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhāī[n.m.;sg.,d.]|bhānā[past-part.f.] sē[postp.] - tabiyat[n.f.;sg.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

x (brother|be liked[past-part.f.]) from - health achcha be[pres.sg.23] .

⁵³⁴However, this is only if they are special VIPs.

⁴⁴⁴

अभी बहुत काम करना है .

abhī bahut kām karnā hai .

ab[adv.hī] bahut kām[n.m.;sg.,d.]|kām[n.m.;sg.,d.] karnā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

now very (lust|task) do[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

⁴⁴⁵

अभी पाण्डवों को मिलकर कोई नये प्लैन बनाने हैं .

abhī pāṇḍavō̃ kō milkar kōī nayē plan banānē haĩ .

ab[adv.hī] pāṇḍav[n.m.+ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] milnā[abs.] kōī[pn.;d.] nayā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] plan banānā[pres.pl.12hon3.oblig1] .

now Pandava to receive[abs.] some new plan create[pres.pl.12hon3.oblig1] .

⁵³⁵Brahmins can adjust themselves, and the yoga camp groups bring their teachers with them.

⁴⁴⁶

नवीनता के निमित्त बनना है .

navīntā kē nimitt bannā hai .

navīntā[n.f.;sg.] kē nimitt[x] bannā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

newness x become[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

⁵³⁶However, next season, the VIP building will be ready.

⁴⁴⁷

आदि से कोई न कोई कार्य के लिए निमित्त बनते आये हैं , सभी की विशेषता है इसलिए अभी भी और टचिंग होती रहेगी .

ādi sē kōī na kōī kārya kē liē nimitt bantē āyē haĩ , sabhī kī|key viśhēṣhtā hai isliē abhī bhī aur touching hōtī rahēgī .

ādi[adj.] sē[postp.] kōī na kōī[x] kārya[n.m.;sg.,d.] kē liē[x] nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3.pres-part+ānā] , sab[adv.hī] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key viśhēṣhtā[n.f.;sg.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] isliē ab[adv.hī] bhī[p.] aur touching hōnā[fut.f.sg.23.pres-part+rahnā] .

etc. from one .. or another task for instrument become[pres-perf.pl.m.12hon3.pres-part+ānā] , all (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) speciality be[pres.sg.23] therefore now too and touching be[fut.f.sg.23.pres-part+rahnā] .

⁴⁴⁸

अच्छा है दिल्ली में भी धूम मचानी है .

achchhā hai dillī mē̃ bhī dhūm machānī hai .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] dēhlī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] mē̃[postp.] bhī[p.] dhūm[n.m.;sg.,d.] machānā[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

achcha be[pres.sg.23] Delhi in too x x[pres.sg.23.oblig1] .

⁴⁴⁹

दिल्ली का सेवाधारी पाण्डव पहला निमित्त बने हुए हो .

dillī kā sēvādhārī pāṇḍav pahlā nimitt banē huē hō .

dēhlī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] sēvādhārī[n.m.;sg.,d.] pāṇḍav[n.m.;sg.,d.] pahlā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|bannā[opt.sg.23] hōnā[pres-perf.pl.m.2] .

Delhi of server Pandava x instrument (become[past-part.m.pl.,o.]|become[opt.sg.23]) be[pres-perf.pl.m.2] .

⁵³⁷Whichever zone wishes to have a refresher course in Shantivan can be given this opportunity. ⁵³⁸Instead of looking for a place somewhere else, even if there is only a small number, whatever facilities you have here will not be available anywhere else.

⁴⁵⁰

दिल्ली से नाम बाला होगा ना .

dillī sē nām bālā hōgā nā .

dēhlī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] sē[postp.] nām[n.m.;sg.,d.] bālā[x] hōnā[fut.m.sg.23] nā .

Delhi from name x be[fut.m.sg.23] ∅ .

⁵³⁹So, all the zones are being offered this.

⁴⁵¹

सभी के सकाश से दिल्ली से नाम बाला तो करना ही है .

sabhī kē|K sakāśh sē dillī sē nām bālā tō karnā hī hai .

sab[adv.hī] kā[postp.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.]|K sakāśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] sē[postp.] dēhlī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] sē[postp.] nām[n.m.;sg.,d.] bālā[x] tō karnā[inf.m.sg.d.] hī[p.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

all (of|K) sakaash from Delhi from name x then do[inf.m.sg.d.] only be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴⁵²

कोई ऐसे प्लैन बनाओ , बाम्बे , दिल्ली नई इन्वेन्शन्स निकालो .

kōī aisē plan banāō , bāmbē , dillī naī invēnśansa nikālō .

kōī[pn.;d.] aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] plan banānā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , bāmbē , dēhlī[n.f.ī=>ī;sg.] nayā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] x nikālnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

some such plan create[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] , Bombay , Delhi new x x[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2] .

⁵⁴⁰You can bring your group and all of them will go back refreshed, because here, at least they can meet the Dadis.

⁴⁵³

मधुबन में तो सेवायें ड्रामानुसार बढ़ती ही जाती हैं और बढ़ती जानी हैं .

madhuban mē̃ tō sēvāyē̃ ḍrāmānusār baṛhtī hī jātī haĩ aur baṛhtī jānī haĩ .

madhuban[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] tō sēvā[n.f.+ē̃;pl.d.] ḍrāmānusār baṛhnā[pres-part.f.] hī[p.] jānā[pres.pl.f.12hon3] aur baṛhnā[pres-part.f.] jānnā[pres-perf.pl.f.12hon3]|jānā[pres.pl.12hon3.oblig1] .

Madhuban in then service x grow[pres-part.f.] only go[pres.pl.f.12hon3] and grow[pres-part.f.] (know[pres-perf.pl.f.12hon3]|go[pres.pl.12hon3.oblig1]) .

⁵⁴¹It may or may not be possible for the Dadis to go there, and so at least they can have this chance here.

⁴⁵⁴

यह विंग्स का सेवा का प्लैन भी अच्छा चल रहा है और चलता रहेगा .

yah wings kā sēvā kā plan bhī achchhā chal rahā hai aur chaltā rahēgā .

yah[pn.sg.d.] wing kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] plan bhī[p.] achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] chalnā[pres.sg.m.prog.23] aur chalnā[fut.m.sg.23.pres-part+rahnā] .

this wing of service of plan too achcha continue[pres.sg.m.prog.23] and continue[fut.m.sg.23.pres-part+rahnā] .

⁴⁵⁵

जो निमित्त बनता है उसको सेवा की सफलता का शेयर मिल जाता है .

jō nimitt bantā hai uskō sēvā kī|key saphaltā kā share mil jātā hai .

jō[pn.;d.] nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[pres.sg.m.23] vah[pn.sg.kō] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key saphaltā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] share milnā[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

that instrument become[pres.sg.m.23] that[.kō] service (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) success of x receive[pres.sg.m.23.root+jānā] .

⁵⁴²The groups that offer themselves, whether it is youth or householders, if four to six zones together can make a group, that too can be done, because up there (Gyan Sarovar) the different professions will be served.

⁴⁵⁶

इसलिए निमित्त बनते जाओ और शेयर्स जमा करते जाओ .

isliē nimitt bantē jāō aur śēyarsa jamā kartē jāō .

isliē nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.pres-part+jānā] aur x jamā karnā[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.pres-part+jānā] .

therefore instrument become[opt.pl.2,imp.pl.2.pres-part+jānā] and x accumulate .

⁵⁴³Let there be small groups down below; don’t make the groups too large.

⁴⁵⁷

अच्छा है जो भी चारों ओर निमित्त बनते हैं उन्हों को एक्स्ट्रा लिफ्ट मिल जाती है .

achchhā hai jō bhī chārō̃ ōr nimitt bantē haĩ unhō̃ kō extra lift mil jātī hai .

achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] jō[pn.;d.] bhī[p.] chārō̃ ōr[x] nimitt[n.m.;sg.,d.] bannā[pres.pl.m.12hon3] vah[pn.pl.o.] kō[postp.] extra lift milnā[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] .

achcha be[pres.sg.23] that too everywhere instrument become[pres.pl.m.12hon3] that to extra lift receive[pres.sg.f.23.root+jānā] .

⁵⁴⁴Keep Shantivan busy! ⁵⁴⁵Whoever wants to take this chance can do so. ⁵⁴⁶You can serve your friends and relatives from your heart.

⁴⁵⁸

स्व का पुरूषार्थ तो है लेकिन यह गिफ्ट में लिफ्ट मिलती है .

sva kā purūṣhārth tō hai lēkin yah gift mē̃ lift miltī hai .

sva kā[postp.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] puruṣhārth tō hōnā[pres.sg.23] lēkin yah[pn.sg.d.] gift mē̃[postp.] lift milnā[pres.sg.f.23] .

x of effort then be[pres.sg.23] but this gift in lift receive[pres.sg.f.23] .

⁵⁴⁷Achcha. ⁵⁴⁸You have now been given the programme.

⁴⁵⁹

विदेश वालों को भी सेवा की गिफ्ट मिलती रहती है .

vidēśh vālō̃ kō bhī sēvā kī|key gift miltī rahtī hai .

vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[n.m.ā=>ō̃;pl.o.] kō[postp.] bhī[p.] sēvā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key gift milnā[pres.sg.f.23.pres-part+rahnā] .

abroad those who to too service (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) gift receive[pres.sg.f.23.pres-part+rahnā] .

⁵⁴⁹BapDada also regards the message given by the children to be important. ⁵⁵⁰Achcha.

⁴⁶⁰

भारत वाले विदेश को भी सकाश दे रहे हैं .

bhārat vālē vidēśh kō bhī sakāśh dē rahē haĩ .

bhārat[n.m.;sg.,d.] vālā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] vidēśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] kō[postp.] bhī[p.] sakāśh[n.m.;sg.,d.] dēnā[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

Bharat those who abroad to too sakaash give[pres.pl.m.prog.12hon3] .

⁴⁶¹

तो अच्छा है , अच्छे-अच्छे पाण्डव भी हैं , अच्छी-अच्छी शक्तियां भी हैं .

tō achchhā hai , achchhē-achchhē pāṇḍav bhī haĩ , achchhī-achchhī śhaktiyā̃ bhī haĩ .

tō achchhā[adj.ā=>ā;m.sg.d.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] , achchhā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] pāṇḍav[n.m.;sg.,d.] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] , achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] śhakti[n.f.ī=>iyā̃;pl.d.] bhī[p.] hōnā[pres.pl.12hon3] .

then achcha be[pres.sg.23] , achcha Pandava too be[pres.pl.12hon3] , achcha Shakti too be[pres.pl.12hon3] .

⁴⁶²

सेना बहुत अच्छी सुन्दर है .

sēnā bahut achchhī sundar hai .

sēnā[n.f.;sg.] bahut achchhā[adj.ā=>ī;f.] sundar[adj.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] .

army very achcha x be[pres.sg.23] .

⁴⁶³

बापदादा तो हर एक की विशेषता की दिल में महिमा करते रहते हैं .

bāpdādā tō har ēk kī|key viśhēṣhtā kī|key dil mē̃ mahimā kartē rahtē haĩ .

bāpdādā tō har ēk[x] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key viśhēṣhtā[n.f.;sg.] kā[postp.ā=>ī;f.]|karnā[past-part.f.]|key dil[n.m.;sg.,d.] mē̃[postp.] mahimā[n.f.;sg.] karnā[pres.pl.m.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā] .

BapDada then each one (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) speciality (of|do[past-part.f.]|key) heart in praise do[pres.pl.m.12hon3.pres-part+rahnā] .

⁵⁵¹To all the special souls who have a right to the fortune of God’s sustenance, teachings and shrimat; to the souls who are equal to Baba and who make becoming the embodiment equal to their thinking; to the instrument serversouls who easily attain success in service and for the self through God’s willpower; to those who constantly experience Baba in their combined form; to the companion children who constantly fulfil the relationship of companionship, BapDada’s love, remembrance and namaste.

⁴⁶⁴

ऐसे है ना  ?

aisē hai nā  ?

aisā[adj.ā=>ē;m.o.,m.pl.] hōnā[pres.sg.23] nā  ?

such be[pres.sg.23] ∅  ?

⁵⁵²* * * O MS H A N T I * * *

Abbreviations used

',' Possible choices
1 First person
2 Second person
2hon Honorific second person
3 Third person
abs. Absolute
adj. Adjective
adv. Adverb
conj. Conjunction
d. Direct case (without postposition)
f. Feminine
fut. Future
hab-past. 'Habitual Past' (used to ..)
imp. Imperative
inf. Infinitive
inf+chāhnā To want to + infinitive
inf+dēnā To let (or to allow to) + infinitive
inf+lagnā To start to (or to begin to) + infinitive
inf+pānā To be able to or to be allowed to + infinitive
interj. Interjection
m. Masculine
n. Noun
neg. Negation
o. Oblique case (with postposition)
oblig1 Obligation with hōnā
oblig2 Obligation with paṛnā
oblig3 Obligation with chāhiē
opt. Optative (a type of subjunctive)
p. Particle
past. Past
past-part. Past participle
past-perf. Past perfect
passive Passive or impersonal voice
pl. Plural
pres. Present
pres-part. Present participle
pres-part+ānā Continuity from some past time until the present and into the future
pres-part+bannā Possible to do (passive)
pres-part+jānā To go on + -ing form of the verb (increasing over time)
pres-part+rahnā To continue to + verb (habit)
pres-perf. Present perfect
pn. Pronoun
postp. Postposition
prep. Preposition
prog. Progressive (continuous : be + -ing form of the verb)
root Root of the verb
sg. Singular